JP2021045313A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving game amusement.SOLUTION: A game-control microcomputer 101 of a Pachinko game machine PY1 can execute variable display of a special symbol 1 based on the winning of a game ball into a first start port 11, and can execute variable display of a special symbol 2 based on the winning of a game ball into a second start port 12. The game-control microcomputer 101 changes a game state to a second time-shortening state in response to stopping and displaying a losing symbol B in the variable display of the special symbol 1. Further, the game-control microcomputer 101 changes a game state to a third time-shortening state in response to stopping and displaying a losing symbol D in the variable display of the special symbol 2.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 75

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, in a pachinko gaming machine, a jackpot determination for determining whether or not a jackpot is performed is performed on the condition that the game ball enters the opening and closing opening. When the jackpot determination is performed, a variable display of a special symbol for notifying the jackpot determination result is performed. When the result that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot is derived from the variable display of the special symbol, the jackpot game accompanied by the opening of the openable and closable jackpot is executed (see Patent Document 1).

Then, in the gaming machine according to Patent Document 1, after the jackpot game is executed, the opening / closing start port may be in a time saving state in which it is easier to open than in the normal gaming state (non-time saving state).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-88993

However, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the enjoyment of the game with respect to the game machine in which the opening and closing opening can be changed to a game state in which the opening and closing opening is easier to open than in the normal game state (non-time saving state).

The gaming machine according to the present invention
When a predetermined first variable condition or second variable condition is satisfied, the variable display of the identification information can be executed, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the openable and closable variable winning opening provided in the game area is opened. In a game machine equipped with a game control means for executing a jackpot game accompanied by
The game control means
In response to the stop display of the identification information in a non-specific mode different from the specific mode, the variable start opening provided in the game area is set to a specific game state in which it is easier to open than in the normal game state. There is
The identification information is stopped and displayed in the non-specific mode according to the establishment of the second variable condition, and the identification information is stopped and displayed in the non-specific mode according to the establishment of the first variable condition. It is characterized in that it may be put into a specific gaming state.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in playing games.

It is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the basic embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the game board unit. (A) is a front view explaining the standby state of the board movable body, (B) is a front view explaining the moving state of the board movable body, and (C) is a front view explaining the rotating state of the board movable body. It is a front view of the display. It is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the basic embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the game control board side. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the effect control board side. (A) is a table showing the general figure-related determination information, and (B) is a table showing the special figure-related determination information. (A) is a hit determination table, (B) is a normal map fluctuation pattern determination table, and (C) is an auxiliary game control table. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (C) is a reach determination table. Special figure 1 It is a fluctuation pattern determination table. Special figure 2 is a fluctuation pattern determination table. This is the first look-ahead determination table. This is the second look-ahead determination table. (A) is a jackpot game control table, and (B) is a game state setting table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a demo movie, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a setting screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first normal background image, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a second normal background image, and (C) shows an example of a third normal background image. It is a figure, (D) is a figure which shows an example of the background image for probability variation, (E) is a figure which shows an example of the background image for time saving. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot opening effect, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a round effect, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot ending effect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect symbol, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of an effect symbol display area. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure variation effect of the loss without reach. It is a figure which shows an example from the start of the special figure variation production to the reach. It is a figure which shows an example of N reach. It is a figure which shows an example of L reach. It is a figure which shows an example of L reach, and is the continuation of FIG. 23. It is a figure which shows an example of SP reach. It is a figure which shows an example of SP reach, and is the continuation of FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of SP reach, and is the continuation of FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a movable body production. It is a figure which shows an example of an operation effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a hold production. It is a figure which shows an example of the hold icon change notice. It is a figure which shows an example of the hold icon change notice. It is a flowchart of a game control main process. It is a flowchart of the game control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the sensor detection process, and is the figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 35. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern determination process. It is a flowchart of special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of the effect control main process. It is a flowchart of 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis processing, and is the figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 46. (A) is a special figure 1 jackpot determination table according to the first embodiment, (B) is a special figure 2 jackpot determination table according to the first embodiment, and (C) is a loss symbol according to the first embodiment. It is a type judgment table. (A) is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state according to the first embodiment, and (B) is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the time saving state according to the first embodiment. (A) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state according to the first embodiment, and (B) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the first time saving state according to the first embodiment. .. (A) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the second time saving state according to the first embodiment, and (B) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time saving state according to the first embodiment. is there. (A) is a game state setting table for non-time saving small hit symbol stop display according to the first embodiment, and (B) is a game state setting table for time saving small hit symbol stop display according to the first embodiment. C) is a game state setting table for non-time saving loss symbol stop display according to the first embodiment, and (D) is a game state setting table for time saving loss symbol stop display according to the first embodiment. It is a small hit game control table which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart of the special operation process which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart of the special figure 1 determination process which concerns on 1st Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern determination process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 determination process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a variation pattern determination process according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state that the production is performed in the time saving effect mode which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state which the production is performed in the super-chance mode which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state which the production is performed in the short chance mode which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the game flow which concerns on 1st Embodiment. (A) is a hit determination table according to the second embodiment, (B) is a normal map fluctuation pattern determination table according to the second embodiment, and (C) is an auxiliary game control table according to the second embodiment. is there. It is a figure which shows the game flow which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. In the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table used in the time saving state after the stop display of the small hit symbol, the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol B, and the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol C according to the third embodiment. is there. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a variation pattern determination process according to the third embodiment. (A) is a hit determination table according to the fourth embodiment, (B) is a normal map fluctuation pattern determination table according to the fourth embodiment, and (C) is an auxiliary game control table according to the fourth embodiment. is there. It is a loss symbol type determination table which concerns on 4th Embodiment. (A) is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state according to the fourth embodiment, and (B) is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the first time saving state according to the fourth embodiment. .. (A) is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the second time saving state according to the fourth embodiment, and (B) is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the third time saving state according to the fourth embodiment. is there. (A) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state according to the fourth embodiment, and (B) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the first time saving state according to the fourth embodiment. .. (A) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the second time saving state according to the fourth embodiment, and (B) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time saving state according to the fourth embodiment. is there. (A) is a game state setting table for non-time saving loss symbol stop display according to the fourth embodiment, and (B) is a game state setting table for time saving loss symbol stop display according to the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart of the special operation process which concerns on 4th Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a special figure 1 determination process according to a fourth embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern determination process according to a fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a loss symbol type determination table which concerns on 5th Embodiment.

<Basic embodiment>
First, a basic embodiment of the present invention, which is a premise of the characteristic portion of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In each of the referenced figures, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and duplicate explanations regarding the same parts will be omitted in principle. In the following, for the sake of simplification of description, by describing a symbol or a code that refers to an information, a signal, a physical quantity, a member, etc., the name of the information, a signal, a physical quantity, a member, etc. for the symbol or the code is omitted or abbreviated. Sometimes.

1. 1. Mechanical Configuration of Gaming Machine A pachinko gaming machine PY1 which is a basic embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described. First, the mechanical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4. In the following description, the horizontal and vertical directions of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 are the horizontal and vertical directions (in front view) for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Further, "front" is a direction in which the pachinko gaming machine PY1 approaches the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and "rear" is a direction in which the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1 approaches the pachinko gaming machine PY1. ,explain.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko game machine PY1 includes a game board unit YU including the game board 1 and a game machine frame 2 in which the game board unit YU is housed. The game machine frame 2 has a frame-shaped outer frame 21 fixed to a game store, an inner frame 22 attached to the outer frame 21 to which the game board unit YU is attached, and before being rotatably supported by the inner frame 22. It is provided with a door 23.

The outer frame 21, the inner frame 22, and the front door 23 have substantially the same outer peripheral shape in front view. An inner frame 22 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 21.

The front door 23 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 22. The front door 23 includes a frame-shaped front frame 23 m in which a large opening having a substantially vertically long rectangular shape is formed in the center thereof, and a transparent plate 23t fitted in the opening. When the front door 23 is closed, the game board 1 included in the game board unit YU and the transparent plate 23t face each other. The transparent plate 23t is a transparent synthetic resin plate and is formed into a substantially vertically long rectangular shape. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine PY1 is installed in the game store, the player in front of the pachinko game machine PY1 can visually recognize the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. it can. As the transparent plate 23t, a transparent glass plate may be used instead of the transparent synthetic resin plate. It suffices if the gaming area 6 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 through the transparent plate 23t.

At the lower right of the front surface of the front frame 23 m, a handle 72k that can be rotated to launch the game ball is provided. The amount by which the handle 72k is operated (rotation angle) is associated with the magnitude of the force (launch intensity) applied to the game ball to launch the game ball. Therefore, the game ball is launched with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle 72k.

Further, in the lower part of the front surface of the front frame 23 m, an upper plate 34 that protrudes greatly forward and a lower plate 35 arranged directly below the upper plate 34 are provided. At the center of the front side of the upper plate 34, a first effect button 40k that can be pressed downward is provided. The operation portion visibly protruding from the upper surface of the upper plate 34 of the first effect button 40k is formed into a hemispherical shape. Further, a supply ball storage hole 34A for storing the game ball supplied to the handle 72k is formed on the rear side of the upper surface of the upper plate 34. Further, on the upper surface of the lower plate 35, a surplus ball storage hole 35A for storing a surplus game ball that cannot be accommodated in the supply ball storage hole 34A is provided.

Further, an upper decorative body 31, a right decorative body 32, and a left decorative body 33 projecting forward are provided on the upper side, the right side, and the left side of the transparent plate 23t on the front surface of the front frame 23 m. On the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31, a pair of two speakers 52 capable of outputting sound, specifically, a speaker 52L arranged on the left side and a speaker 52R arranged on the right side are predetermined in the left-right direction facing downward. They are installed side by side at a distance. Further, at the lower part of the right decorative body 32, a second effect button 41k that can be pressed downward is provided. The operation portion of the second effect button 41k is formed in a rod shape. Further, a frame lamp 53 capable of emitting light is provided from the right decorative body 32 to the front right portion of the upper plate 34, and from the left decorative body 33 to the front left portion of the upper plate 34.

The positions and numbers of the members and devices provided in the game machine frame 2 can be appropriately changed as long as they do not interfere with the game.

Next, the game board unit YU will be described with reference to FIG. 2 in addition to FIG. The game board unit YU has a game board 1 and a board production unit EU attached to the back surface of the game board 1. First, the game board 1 will be described. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate. A substantially circular opening 1A is formed in the substantially center of the game board 1.

On the front surface of the game board 1, a substantially ring-shaped center decorative body 61 is formed so as to project forward along the opening 1A. Further, on the outside of the center decoration body 61, an outer rail 62 formed in a substantially ring shape so as to largely surround the center decoration body 61, and an outer rail between the left side portion of the outer rail 62 and the center decoration body 61. A curved inner rail 63 substantially parallel to the center decoration 61 and 62 is formed.

Then, on the front surface of the game board 1, the area surrounded by the center decorative body 61, the outer rail 62, the inner rail 63, and the like forms the game area 6. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is divided into a game area 6 and other areas by the center decorative body 61, the outer rail 62, and the inner rail 63. Further, the area surrounded by the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 63 forms a launch area 7 through which the launched game ball can pass toward the game area 6.

The game area 6 is an area in which a game ball launched by operating the handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing a game with the pachinko gaming machine PY1. A large number of gaming nails (not shown) are provided in the gaming area 6. The game nail appropriately fits the game ball that enters the game area 6 and flows down the game area 6 into the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the gate 13, the large winning opening 14, and the like. It constitutes a route to guide to.

A general winning device 10D is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 6. In the general winning device 10D, the general winning opening 10 is formed so that a game ball can be entered. When the game balls enter the general winning opening 10, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. The game ball that has entered the general winning opening 10 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, a first start winning device 11D is provided immediately below the center of the center decoration body 61 in the game area 6. In the first start winning device 11D, the first start opening 11 is formed so that a game ball can enter. The first start winning device 11D has a non-operating structure that does not operate. Therefore, the first starting port 11 is constant (invariant) without changing the ease of entering the game ball. When the game balls enter the first starting port 11, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. The game ball that has entered the first start port 11 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

From the left side portion to the lower end portion of the center decorative body 61, a warp portion 61w through which the game ball is passed is formed. The entrance to the warp portion 61w is formed on the left side portion of the center decoration body 61. The game ball that has entered the warp portion 61w passes through the inside of the warp portion 61w and exits from the exit. A stage 61s on which the game ball can roll is provided on the upper surface of the lower end portion of the center decorative body 61 near the exit of the warp portion 61w. At the tip of the stage 61s, a downward guiding portion 61y that guides the game ball downward is provided. A first starting port 11 is provided directly below the downward guiding portion 61y.

A second start winning device (so-called "electric chew") 12D is provided directly below the first start opening 11 in the game area 6. The electric chew 12D is formed with a second starting port 12 that can be changed into a closed mode in which the game ball cannot enter and an open mode in which the game ball can enter. The second starting port 12 takes a closed mode and an open mode by the electric chew opening / closing member 12k included in the electric chew 12D. That is, the second starting port 12 is opened and closed by the operation of the electric chew opening / closing member 12k.

The electric chew opening / closing member 12k is composed of a substantially L-shaped member in front view, and normally closes the second starting port 12. The electric chew opening / closing member 12k can project forward from the retracted state in which the front end surface is flush with the game area 6. When the electric chew opening / closing member 12k protrudes forward, the electric chew opening / closing member 12k protrudes vertically to the game area 6, and the second starting port 12 opens so that the ball can enter. Specifically, a vertical portion erected at the left end of the horizontal portion of the electric chew opening / closing member 12k receives the game ball and is guided from the horizontal portion to the second starting port 12.

In this way, the game ball can enter the second starting port 12 only when the electric chew opening / closing member 12k is in the open state. When the game balls enter the second starting port 12, a predetermined number (for example, two) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. The game ball that has entered the second starting port 12 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, a gate 13 is provided on the right side of the center decoration body 61. The gate 13 is configured so that a game ball can pass through. Even if the game ball passes through the gate 13, the prize ball is not paid out. The game ball that has passed through the gate 13 flows down the game area 6 as it is.

A large winning device 14D is provided on the right side of the first starting winning device 11D in the game area 6 and on the downstream side of the gate 13. The large winning device 14D is formed with a large winning opening 14 that can be changed into a closed mode in which a game ball cannot enter and an open mode in which a game ball can enter. The big winning opening 14 takes a closed mode and an open mode by the AT opening / closing member 14k provided in the big winning device 14D. That is, the large winning opening 14 is opened and closed by the operation of the AT opening / closing member 14k.

The AT opening / closing member 14k is a movable member made of a flat plate having a substantially horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, and normally closes the large winning opening 14. A horizontal rotation axis is provided at the lower end of the AT opening / closing member 14k. The AT opening / closing member 14k can rotate about 90 degrees around its rotation axis so that the upper end thereof falls forward. When the AT opening / closing member 14k rotates, the AT opening / closing member 14k is in a state of projecting vertically to the game area 6, and the large winning opening 14 is opened so that the ball can enter.

In this way, it is possible to enter the game ball into the large winning opening 14 only when the AT opening / closing member 14k is in the open state. When the game ball enters the large winning opening 14, a predetermined number of game balls (1 in the first embodiment) are paid out as prize balls. The game ball that has entered the large winning opening 14 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, below the large winning device 14D in the game area 6, the upper surface thereof is formed diagonally downward to the left, and a guidance path 64 for guiding the game ball to the second starting port 12 is a game area 6 (front surface of the game board 1). It is provided so as to project forward from. The game ball that rolls on the upper surface of the guidance path 64 can flow down toward the second starting port 12, but basically cannot enter the first starting port 11.

In addition, the entry of the game ball into the first start port 11, the second start port 12, the large winning opening 14, and the general winning opening 10 and the passage of the game ball through the gate 13 are collectively referred to as the first starting port 11, Collectively referred to as "winning" to the second starting opening 12, the large winning opening 14, the general winning opening 10, and the gate 13.

By the way, the game area 6 in which the game ball can flow down can be divided into a left game area 6A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 6B on the right side. The operation mode of the handle 72k that launches the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 6A is called "left-handed". On the other hand, the operation mode of the handle 72k that launches the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 6B is called "right-handed".

In the game area 6, the flow path through which the game ball can flow down when the game ball is launched by hitting left is called the first flow path R1, and the game ball can flow down when the game ball is launched by hitting right. The flow path is referred to as a second flow path R2. The first flow path R1 and the second flow path R2 are also composed of a large number of gaming nails (not shown).

A first starting port 11 and two general winning openings 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the first starting port 11 or the general winning opening 10 by firing the game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1 by hitting the left. On the other hand, a second starting port 12, a gate 13, and a large winning opening 14 are provided on the second flow path R2. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the gate 13, the second starting port 12, or the large winning opening 14 by firing the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting right.

At the lowermost part of the game area 6, two out ports 19 are provided to discharge the game balls that have been driven into the game area 6 but have not won any of the winning openings to the outside of the game area 6. There is. In addition, the number of prize balls for winning each winning opening can be set as appropriate.

Next, the board production unit EU attached to the back surface of the game board 1 will be described. The board production unit EU is a unitization of a plurality of devices that mainly perform production. An image display device 50 and a board movable device 55 are attached to the board effect unit EU.

The image display device 50 is composed of a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, and includes a display unit 50a capable of displaying a 3D image. The image display device 50 is arranged several centimeters behind the game board 1.

The board movable device 55 includes a movable board movable body 55k. The board movable body 55k has a horizontally long plate-shaped elevating member 55k2 that is maintained in a horizontal state, and a substantially elliptical rotating member 55k1 provided at the center of the elevating member 55k2 in the left-right direction. The board movable body 55k is arranged between the game board 1 and the image display device 50. In the standby state in which the board movable body 55k is arranged at the initial position, the lower end portion of the board movable body 55k, specifically, the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1 is slightly downward from the upper end of the opening 1A of the game board 1. positioned. That is, the board movable body 55k is arranged so that only a part of the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1 can be seen by the player and most of it cannot be seen in the standby state (see FIG. 3A).

Then, the board movable body 55k can descend from the initial position to a predetermined operating position as a whole, rise from the operating position, and return to the initial position (see FIG. 3B). The predetermined operating position is a position where the board movable body 55k is located substantially in the center of the opening 1A when viewed from the front. Here, a predetermined working position can be appropriately set, regardless of whether the board movable body 55k is placed above or below the substantially center of the opening 1A in front view. Good.

Further, the rotating member 55k1 can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise in the front view around the rotation axis formed in the front-rear direction at the center thereof (see FIG. 3C). The rotational movement of the rotating member 55k1 can be executed when the board movable body 55k moves from the standby position to the operating position, is held in the operating position, and moves from the operating position to the standby position.

The positions and numbers of the members and devices provided on the game board unit YU can be appropriately changed as long as they do not interfere with the game.

Next, the indicators 8 arranged on the right side (the portion other than the game area 6) substantially at the center in the vertical direction of the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, the display 8 has a special figure 1 display 81a and a second special symbol (hereinafter, “special figure 2”) for variably displaying the first special symbol (hereinafter, “special figure 1”). A special figure 2 display 81b for variably displaying) and a normal figure display 82 for variably displaying a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as “normal figure”) are included. Further, the indicators 8 include a special figure 1 hold indicator 83a for displaying the special figure 1 hold number described later and a special figure 2 hold indicator 83b for displaying the special figure 2 hold number described later. ..

The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery triggered by winning a prize in the first starting port 11 of the game ball is performed. Further, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the special figure 2 lottery triggered by winning a prize in the second starting port 12 of the game ball is performed. The special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery will be described later. In the following description, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are collectively referred to as a "special figure", and the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery are collectively referred to as a "special figure lottery". Further, the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are collectively referred to as "special figure display 81". Further, the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a and the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b are collectively referred to as "special figure hold indicator 83".

The variable display of the special figure notifies the result of the special figure lottery. In the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The stop-displayed special figure (stop special figure) is identification information representing the result of the special figure lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. If the stop-displayed special figure is a predetermined special figure, a big hit game is performed with the opening of the big winning opening 14.

The special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are each composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side. The lighting mode of the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b represents a special figure corresponding to the result of the special figure lottery, that is, the result of the special figure lottery. For example, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a big hit, the final result is "□□ ■■ □□ ■■" (□: lit, ■: off), which is the first, second, fifth, and sixth from the left. A certain LED lights up. This lighting mode is a jackpot symbol and represents a jackpot. If the result of the special drawing lottery is lost, only the LED on the far right, such as "■■■■■■■ □", will finally light up. This lighting mode is a loss symbol and represents a loss. The lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all the LEDs may be turned off as a lost symbol.

Further, in the variable display of the special figure, the variable display of the special figure is performed over a predetermined fluctuation time before the special figure is stopped and displayed. The mode of the variable display of the special figure is, for example, a mode in which each LED is turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not particularly limited, and if each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), all the LEDs may be set appropriately, such as blinking all at once.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, even if the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the special drawing lottery and the variable display of the special drawing may not be performed immediately. Specifically, it is a case where a prize is given to the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 of the game ball during the execution of the variable display of the special figure or the execution of the jackpot game. In this case, the special drawing lottery and the variable display of the special drawing are suspended based on the winning. This reserved special figure lottery and variable display of special figures are called "special figure hold".

The special figure hold includes the special figure 1 lottery held based on the winning of the first starting port 11, the "special figure 1 holding" representing the variable display of the special figure 1, and the winning of the second starting port 12. There are a special figure 2 lottery held based on the above, and a "special figure 2 hold" representing the variable display of the special figure 2. Then, the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a displays the number of the special figure 1 hold, that is, the number of the special figure 1 lottery and the variable display of the special figure 1 held. On the other hand, the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b displays the number of the special figure 2 hold, that is, the number of the special figure 2 lottery held and the variable display of the special figure 2.

It is possible to set or not set the upper limit of the number of special figure 1 hold and the number of special figure 2 hold. Further, when an upper limit is set for the number of special figure 1 hold and the number of special figure 2 hold, the number of special figure 1 hold and the number of special figure 2 hold may be the same or different. In the basic embodiment, it is assumed that the upper limit of the number of special figure 1 hold and the number of special figure 2 hold is set to "4".

Each of the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a and the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b is composed of four LEDs, and by turning on the LEDs for the number of the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold. Figure 1 Displays the number of holds and Special Figure 2 Holds. In the following, the number of special figure 1 hold is referred to as "special figure 1 hold number (U1)", and the number of special figure 2 hold is referred to as "special figure 2 hold number (U2)". In addition, the "special figure 1 hold number" and the "special figure 2 hold number" are collectively referred to as the "special figure hold number". Further, "special figure 1 hold indicator 83a" and "special figure 2 hold indicator 83b" are collectively referred to as "special figure hold indicator 83".

Further, the variable display of the normal map is executed when the general map lottery is performed when the game ball wins a prize at the gate 13. Then, the variable display of the general map notifies the result of the general map lottery. In the variable display of the normal map, the normal map is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The stopped-displayed normal map (stop-displayed normal map) is identification information representing the result of the general map lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. When the stop-displayed normal map is a predetermined specific normal map, an auxiliary game is performed with the opening of the second starting port 12.

The normal figure display 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs. The lighting mode of the normal figure display 82 represents a normal figure according to the result of the normal figure lottery, that is, the result of the normal figure lottery. If the result of the regular drawing lottery is a hit, both LEDs will eventually turn on, such as "□□" (□: on, ■: off). This lighting mode is a hit symbol and represents a hit. If the result of the regular drawing lottery is lost, only the right LED will light up as "■ □" in the end. This lighting mode is a loss symbol and represents a loss. The lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the general drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. For example, a mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a lost symbol.

Further, before the normal map is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal map is performed for a predetermined fluctuation time. In the basic embodiment, the variable display mode of the normal diagram is a mode in which both LEDs are turned on alternately. The mode of the variable display in the normal drawing is not particularly limited, and if each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), all the LEDs may be appropriately set such as blinking all at once. ..

2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7. As shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the game control board 100 that controls the game (progress of the game) capable of obtaining the game profit, and the game control board 100 responds to the control of the game. Power is supplied to the effect control board 120 that controls the effect, the image control board 140 that controls the image, the payout control board 170 that controls the payout of the game ball, and the boards 100, 120, 140, 170. The power supply board 190 is attached.

A power switch 191 is connected to the power supply board 190. The power on / off is switched by the ON / OFF operation of the power switch 191.

As shown in FIG. 6, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter, “game control microcomputer”) 101 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to a program is mounted on the game control board 100. Therefore, the game control board 100 can be positioned as a game control unit that controls the game. In addition, the game that can acquire the game profit to be controlled by the game control board 100 includes a special figure lottery, a variable display of the special figure, a big hit game, a setting of the game state described later, a normal figure lottery, and a variable display of the normal figure. , Auxiliary games, etc. are included.

The game control microcomputer 101 includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 that stores programs and tables for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 that is used as a work memory, and a game. A gaming CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 that executes a program stored in the ROM 103 is included.

The game ROM 103 stores a program for performing a game control main process, a game control side timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later. Further, the game ROM 103 includes a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a reach determination table, a special figure variation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a game state setting table, a hit determination table, and an auxiliary. A game control table and the like are stored. The gaming ROM 103 may be externally attached.

Further, the gaming RAM 104 is provided with a special figure holding storage unit 105. Here, the special figure reservation storage unit 105 will be described. As described above, if there is a prize in the first start port 11 or the second start port 12 of the game ball, the special figure hold can occur, but if the special figure hold is possible, that is, the number of special figure hold is When the upper limit is not reached, judgment information consisting of various random numbers for performing a special drawing lottery or the like is acquired based on this winning. Then, this determination information is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as the special figure reservation. In the following, the judgment information acquired by winning a prize in the first starting port 11 of the game ball is referred to as "special figure 1 related judgment information", and is acquired by winning a prize in the second starting port 12 of the game ball. Judgment information is referred to as "special figure 2 related judgment information". Further, the special figure 1 related judgment information and the special figure 2 related judgment information are collectively referred to as "special figure related judgment information".

Then, the special figure 1 related determination information is stored in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a in the special figure hold storage unit 105 as the special figure 1 hold. On the other hand, the special figure 2 related determination information is stored in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b in the special figure hold storage unit 105 as the special figure 2 hold. The number of special figure 1 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a, that is, the upper limit of the special figure 1 hold number is set to "4". Further, the number of special figure 2 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b, that is, the upper limit value of the special figure 2 hold number is set to "4".

Further, various sensors and solenoids are connected to the game control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output by various sensors are input to the game control board 100. Further, the game control board 100 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various sensors connected to the game control board 100 include a general winning opening sensor 10a, a first starting opening sensor 11a, a second starting opening sensor 12a, a gate sensor 13a, and a large winning opening sensor 14a. ..

The general winning opening sensor 10a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning opening 10. The first start port sensor 11a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first start port 11. The second starting port sensor 12a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 12. The gate sensor 13a detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 13. The large winning opening sensor 14a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening 14.

Further, various actuators connected to the game control board 100 include an electric chew solenoid 12s and an AT solenoid 14s. The electric chew solenoid 12s drives the electric chew opening / closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D. The AT solenoid 14s drives the AT opening / closing member 14k of the grand prize device 14D.

The type and number of sensors connected to the game control board 100 can be appropriately changed as long as they do not interfere with the game. Further, the type and number of actuators connected to the game control board 100 can be appropriately changed as long as they do not interfere with the game.

Further, indicators 8 (special figure display 81, normal figure display 82, and special figure hold display 83) are connected to the game control board 100. The display control of these indicators 8 is performed by the game control microcomputer 101.

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands to the payout control board 170, and also receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. The card unit CU and the payout device 73 are connected to the payout control board 170, and the launcher 72 is also connected to the payout control board 170. Further, the card unit CU is a device installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and enabling ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card.

The payout control board 170 drives the payout motor 73m of the payout device 73 to pay out prize balls and rental balls based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 101 and the signal from the connected card unit CU. The prize balls and rental balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensor 73a for counting.

Further, the launching device 72 is a device for launching a game ball. The handle 72k constitutes an operation unit or an input unit that receives an operation for launching the game ball to the launching device 72, and is included in the launching device 72. The handle 72k is provided with a touch switch 72a capable of detecting contact of a person such as a player with the handle 72k. When the player operates the handle 72k, the touch switch 72a detects the contact of the player with the handle 72k and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170 via the launch control circuit 175.

Further, a firing volume knob 72b capable of detecting the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k is connected to the handle 72k. The launching device 72 drives the launching motor 72m so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the knob 72b of the launching volume. In the pachinko gaming machine PY1, one gaming ball is launched about every 0.6 seconds while the rotation operation to the handle 72k is maintained.

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands including information about the game to the effect control board 120 according to the progress of the game. The effect control board 120 can grasp the progress of the game (game control content) by the game control board 100 based on various commands sent from the game control board 100.

The connection between the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the game control board 100 to the effect control board 120. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120.

As shown in FIG. 7, the effect control board 120 is mounted with an effect control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter, “effect control microcomputer”) 121 that controls the effect of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to a program. The effect control board 120 can be positioned as an effect control unit that controls the effect together with the image control board 140, the voice control circuit 161 and the sub drive board 162, which will be described later. However, the effect control unit includes at least the effect control board 120, and uses the effect devices (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, board movable body 55k, etc.) to produce a game, wait for customers, and promote operations. It suffices if the production can be controlled.

The effects to be controlled by the effect control board 120 include game effects (special figure variation effect, hold effect, jackpot game effect, etc.), customer waiting effect, operation of the first effect button 40k and the operation of the second effect button 41k. It includes an operation promotion effect that encourages operation during the valid period (operation valid period).

The effect control microcomputer 121 is stored in an effect ROM 123 that stores a program for controlling the effect as the game progresses by the game control board 100, an effect RAM 124 that is used as a work memory, and an effect ROM 123. The effect CPU 122 that executes the program is included.

The effect ROM 123 stores a program for performing an effect control main process, a receive interrupt process, a 1 ms timer interrupt process, a 10 ms timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later. The production ROM 123 may be externally attached.

The effect RAM 124 stores a start winning command holding storage unit 125 that stores a start winning command described later, a symbol designation command storage unit 126 that stores a symbol designation command described later, and a special figure that stores a special figure variation start command described later. A fluctuation start command storage unit 127 is provided.

An image control board 140 is connected to the effect control board 120. The effect control microcomputer 121 of the effect control board 120 controls the display of the image display device 50 on the image control board 140 based on the command received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. To do. The connection between the effect control board 120 and the image control board 140 can be both transmission of a signal from the effect control board 120 to the image control board 140 and transmission of a signal from the image control board 140 to the effect control board 120. It is a two-way communication connection.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 that stores a program for image control and the like, an image RAM 143 that is used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 that executes a program stored in the image ROM 142. .. Further, the image control board 140 is a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 145 that stores image data displayed on the image display device 50, and a VRAM (Video) used for developing image data stored in the CGROM 145. It is equipped with a Random Access Memory) 146 and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144. All or part of these electronic components may be composed of one chip.

In the CGROM 145, for example, image data (still image data, moving image data, specifically, characters, items, patterns, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc.) for displaying an image displayed on the image display device 50 (directing). (Including patterns) and image data such as background images) are stored.

The VDP 144 reads the image data from the CGROM 145 and develops it in the expansion area in the VRAM 146 according to the display list created by the image CPU 141 based on the command from the effect control microcomputer 121. Then, the expanded image data is appropriately combined and the image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146. Then, the image drawn in the frame buffer is output to the image display device 50 as an RGB signal. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the display unit 50a.

The display list is composed of a group of commands for instructing the execution of drawing on a frame-by-frame basis. The display list contains information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position where the image is drawn, the display priority, the display magnification, and the transmittance of the image.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 receives voice, music, and sound effects from the speaker 52 via the voice control circuit 161 based on the command received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. Outputs sound effects, etc.

Audio data such as audio output from the speaker 52 is stored in the effect ROM 123 of the effect control board 120. The voice control circuit 161 may be configured by a board to mount a CPU. In this case, the CPU may be made to execute voice control. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the board and the audio data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140, and the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140.

Further, various sensors serving as input units and various actuators serving as drive sources are connected to the effect control board 120 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various sensors are input to the effect control board 120. Further, the effect control board 120 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various switches connected to the effect control board 120 include a first effect button sensor 40a and a second effect button sensor 41a. The first effect button sensor 40a detects that the first effect button 40k has been pressed. The second effect button sensor 41a detects that the second effect button 41k has been pressed. When the first effect button sensor 40a and the second effect button sensor 41a detect that they have been operated, they output a signal corresponding to the detected content to the effect control board 120.

The type and number of switches connected to the effect control board 120 can be appropriately changed as long as they do not interfere with the game. Further, the type and number of actuators connected to the effect control board 120 can be appropriately changed as long as they do not interfere with the game.

The various actuators connected to the effect control board 120 include a motor for rotating members 55m1 and a motor for elevating members 55m2. The rotary member motor 55m1 can drive the rotary member 55k1 to rotate the rotary member 55k1. The elevating member motor 55m2 can raise or lower the elevating member 55k2. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of the rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2, and controls the operation of the rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2 via the subdrive substrate 162. ..

In the following, the operations of the "rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2" may be collectively referred to as "the operation of the board movable body 55k". Further, rotating the rotating member 55k1 and lowering or raising the elevating member 55k2 are also referred to as "rotating, lowering or raising the board movable body 55k".

Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls the lighting of the frame lamp 53 and the like via the sub drive board 162 based on the command received from the game control board 100 and the like. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data for determining lighting / extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) for determining the light emission mode of the frame lamp 53, and the frame lamp 53 is subjected to the light emission pattern data. Control the light emission. The data stored in the effect ROM 123 of the effect control board 120 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

The sub drive board 162 may be configured by the board to mount the CPU. In this case, the CPU may be made to execute the lighting control of the frame lamp 53 and the like and the operation control of the panel movable body 55k. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the substrate, and the data related to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

3. 3. Main games played by the gaming machine Next, the main games played by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 15.

3-1. Games related to Fuzu First, we will explain the games related to Fuzu. When the launched game ball passes through the gate 13, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can execute the general drawing lottery. When the normal map lottery is performed, the normal map display 82 performs a variable display of the normal map (stop display after performing the variable display). Here, there are a hit symbol and a lost symbol in the normal figure that is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the lost symbol of the normal figure is also referred to as "missed normal figure" in order to distinguish it from the lost symbol of the special figure described later.

When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to the passage of the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the lost general map is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed, and the game related to the passage of the gate 13 ends. Further, in the following, the passage of the game ball through the gate 13 when the variable display of the normal map or the auxiliary game is not performed is referred to as "the establishment of the normal map variation start condition".

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 performs a series of games such as variable display of the normal map and auxiliary games based on the fact that the normal map fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the normal map related judgment information is acquired, and the general map lottery is performed. Can be done. As shown in FIG. 8A, the acquired general figure-related determination information includes a normal symbol random number. Ordinary symbol random numbers are random numbers (judgment information) for performing collision detection. A range is appropriately provided for each random number.

3-1-1. Hit determination The hit determination is a determination for determining whether or not to win (whether or not to execute an auxiliary game) using, for example, a hit determination table as shown in FIG. 9A. The hit determination table can be associated with the gaming state described later. When associated with the game state, the hit determination table includes a hit determination table used in the non-time reduction state (non-time reduction hit determination table) and a hit determination table used in the time reduction state (time reduction hit determination table).

In each hit determination table, the determination value of the normal symbol random number (ordinary symbol random number determination value) is appropriately distributed to the hit and the loss which are the results of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 collates the acquired ordinary symbol random numbers with the hit determination table to determine whether it is a hit or a loss. If the result of the hit determination is a hit, the hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the normal figure. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a loss, the lost normal map is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the normal map. The winning probability can be changed as appropriate.

3-1-2. Normal map fluctuation pattern determination / normal map variable display The normal map fluctuation pattern determination is a determination for determining the normal map fluctuation pattern using, for example, the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table as shown in FIG. 9B. The normal map fluctuation pattern is identification information related to predetermined items related to the variable display of the normal map such as the normal map fluctuation time.

The normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state). When associated with the game state (non-time saving state / time saving state), the normal figure fluctuation pattern judgment table includes the normal figure fluctuation pattern judgment table (non-time saving normal figure fluctuation pattern judgment table) and the time saving used in the non-time saving state. There is a normal map fluctuation pattern judgment table (time saving normal map fluctuation pattern judgment table) used in the state.

In each normal map fluctuation pattern determination table, one normal map fluctuation pattern, which is the result of the normal map fluctuation pattern determination, is stored for each normal map to be stopped. That is, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can have different normal map fluctuation times between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. For example, in the non-time saving state, the variable display of the normal map when the lost normal map (lost normal map) is stopped and displayed is determined to be the normal map fluctuation pattern in which the normal map fluctuation time is 30 seconds, and the winning symbol is set. Regarding the variable display of the normal map when the stop display is performed, the normal map fluctuation pattern in which the normal map fluctuation time is 30 seconds is determined. In addition, in the time saving state, the variable display of the normal map when the lost normal map is stopped and displayed is determined to be the normal map fluctuation pattern in which the normal figure fluctuation time is 5 seconds, and the normal map when the hit symbol is stopped and displayed is determined. The variable display of is determined to be a normal map fluctuation pattern in which the normal map fluctuation time is 5 seconds. It should be noted that these fluctuation times of the normal map can be changed as appropriate.

Then, the normal map display 82 performs variable display of the normal map variation time associated with the normal map fluctuation pattern determined by the normal map fluctuation pattern determination. By performing the hit determination and the normal map fluctuation pattern determination in this way, the normal map display 82 performs variable display of the normal map.

3-1-3. Auxiliary game Auxiliary game is a variable display of a normal figure, and is executed when a winning symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a display result (result of a general figure lottery). In the auxiliary game, the electric chew 12D opens

The elements constituting the auxiliary game (auxiliary game component) include various elements such as the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened and the opening time for each opening. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 controls the auxiliary game by using the auxiliary game control table. Auxiliary game components are stored in the auxiliary game control table. For example, as shown in FIG. 9C, it is possible to associate a gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state) with the auxiliary game control table. That is, it is possible to associate the auxiliary game component with the game state (non-time saving state / time saving state). The specific contents of each element such as the number of times of opening and the opening time can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can make the opening time of the electric chew 12D different between the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state and the auxiliary game in the time saving state. For example, in the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened only for the first opening time in which it is difficult to make the electric chew 12D win a game ball such as 0.2 seconds. On the other hand, in the auxiliary game in the time saving state, the game ball is won the electric chew 12D for a longer time than the first opening time such as opening twice for 2.5 seconds with an interval (closing) of 1.0 second. The electric chew 12D is opened only for the second opening time, which is easy to make.

In the following, the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is also referred to as "short open auxiliary game". On the other hand, the auxiliary game in the time saving state is also called "long open auxiliary game". Further, the opening time in each auxiliary game is the total time in the auxiliary game, and is opened a plurality of times in one auxiliary game, for example, opening once and then opening again with an interval of closing once. It may be configured as follows.

3-2. Games related to special figures Next, games related to special figures will be described. When the launched game ball wins the first starting port 11, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can execute the special drawing 1 lottery. When the special figure 1 lottery is performed, the special figure 1 display 81a performs a variable display of the special figure 1 (stop display after performing the variable display) to notify the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the special figure 1 that is stopped and displayed includes a jackpot symbol and a lost symbol. That is, the result of the special figure 1 lottery has a big hit and a loss.

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is completed. In addition, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not performed, and the game based on the winning is finished.

Similarly, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can execute the special figure 2 lottery when the launched game ball wins the second starting port 12. When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 display 81b performs a variable display of the special figure 2 (stop display after performing the variable display) to notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the special figure 2 that is stopped and displayed includes a jackpot symbol and a lost symbol. That is, the result of the special figure 2 lottery includes a big hit and a loss.

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is completed. Further, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not performed, and the game based on the winning is finished.

Further, in the following, the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 11 is referred to as "the establishment of the first starting condition", and the winning of the game ball in the second starting opening 12 is "the establishment of the second starting condition". That is. Further, "the establishment of the first starting condition" and "the establishment of the second starting condition" are collectively referred to as "the establishment of the starting condition". In addition, the lost symbol of the special symbol is also referred to as a "lost special symbol" in order to distinguish it from the lost symbol of the above-mentioned ordinary figure.

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 performs a series of games such as variable display of special figures and a jackpot game based on the fact that the starting condition is satisfied, the special figure-related determination information is acquired, and the special figure lottery is performed. Then, in order to perform the variable display of the special figure, various judgments are made on the special figure-related determination information. As shown in FIG. 8B, the special symbol-related determination information to be acquired includes a special symbol random number, a jackpot symbol type random number, a reach random number, and a special symbol variation pattern random number.

The special symbol random number is a random number (judgment information) for performing a jackpot judgment. The jackpot symbol type random number is a random number (judgment information) for determining the jackpot symbol type. The reach random number is a random number (judgment information) for performing reach determination. The special symbol fluctuation pattern random number is a random number (judgment information) for determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. A range is appropriately provided for each random number. Next, each determination performed using the special figure-related determination information will be described.

3-2-1. Jackpot determination The jackpot determination is to determine whether or not a jackpot (whether or not to execute a jackpot game), in other words, either a jackpot or a loss, using the jackpot determination table. As shown in FIG. 10A, for example, the jackpot determination table can be provided in association with the gaming state described later. Specifically, the jackpot determination table includes a jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state described later (hereinafter referred to as "normal probability jackpot determination table") and a jackpot determination table used in the high probability state described later (hereinafter referred to as "big hit determination table"). , "High probability jackpot judgment table").

In each jackpot determination table associated with the game state, the determination value of the special symbol random number (special symbol random number determination value) is assigned to the jackpot and the loss which are the results of the jackpot determination. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 collates the acquired special symbol random numbers with the jackpot determination table associated with the gaming state, and determines whether it is a jackpot or a loss. As shown in FIG. 10A, the high-probability jackpot determination table has more special symbol random number determination values determined to be jackpots than the normal probability jackpot determination table.

It is possible to appropriately change the method of allocating the special symbol random number determination value to the jackpot probability and the determination results of various jackpot determinations.

3-2-2. Jackpot symbol type determination In the jackpot symbol type determination, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, the jackpot symbol type (big hit symbol type) is determined using the jackpot symbol type determination table as shown in FIG. 10 (B). It is to be. It is possible to associate the jackpot symbol type with the jackpot content, in other words, the jackpot component (content advantageous to the player) composed of the game privilege given to the player.

In the jackpot symbol type determination table, the type of special symbol that is variably displayed (special diagram 1 / special diagram 2), in other words, the winning of the jackpot symbol type determination (which caused the jackpot symbol type determination) is performed. It is associated with the type of starting port (first starting port 11 / second starting port 12). That is, in the jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed and the jackpot used when the variable display of the special figure 2 is performed. There is a symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table).

Multiple types of jackpot symbols can be set. In each jackpot symbol type determination table, the determination value of the jackpot symbol type random number (the jackpot symbol type random number determination value) is assigned to the jackpot symbol type which is the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 collates the acquired jackpot symbol type random numbers with the jackpot symbol type determination table to determine the type of jackpot symbol. Then, in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols.

The type of the jackpot symbol of the special figure 1 and the type of the jackpot symbol of the special figure 2 can be set as appropriate. For example, as in the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 10 (B), the jackpot symbol of the special figure 1 As a jackpot symbol A, a jackpot symbol B, and a jackpot symbol C, three types of jackpot symbols are provided, and as a jackpot symbol of special figure 2, three types of jackpot symbols D, a jackpot symbol E, and a jackpot symbol F are used. Can be provided. Then, as in the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 10B, in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. ing. The distribution rate for each jackpot symbol type can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the types of jackpot symbols can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

3-2-3. Reach judgment In the reach judgment, for example, when the result of the jackpot judgment is a loss, whether or not to generate the reach by the special figure variation effect described later is determined by using the reach judgment table as shown in FIG. 10 (C). To decide.

The reach determination table can be associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state). When associated with the gaming state, for example, the reach determination table includes a reach determination table (non-time reduction reach determination table) used in the non-time reduction state and a reach determination table (time reduction reach) used in the non-time reduction state. Judgment table).

In each reach judgment table, the judgment value of the reach random number (reach random number judgment value) is divided into "with reach (generate reach)" and "without reach (do not generate reach)" which are the results of reach judgment. There is. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 collates the acquired reach random numbers with the reach determination table, and determines whether or not there is reach (whether or not to generate reach).

As shown in FIG. 10C, it is possible to make the number of reach random number determination values determined to be "reachable (generate reach)" different between the non-time reduction reach determination table and the time reduction reach determination table. It is possible. In the following, the result of the reach judgment "with reach (generate reach)" performed on the premise that the result of the jackpot judgment is "loss" is referred to as "loss with reach", and "without reach (without reach). "Does not cause reach)" is sometimes referred to as "loss without reach".

3-2-4. Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment In the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment, regardless of whether the result of the jackpot judgment is a jackpot or a loss, for example, a fluctuation pattern judgment table of a special symbol as shown in FIGS. 11 to 12 (special figure fluctuation pattern). The determination table) is used to determine the variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure (special figure variation pattern).

The special figure fluctuation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined items related to the special figure fluctuation time, the so-called “scale”, the effect flow (effect content) of the special figure variation effect described later, and the like. It should be noted that the special figure fluctuation pattern may include identification information regarding the result of the jackpot determination and the result of the reach determination, in addition to the special figure fluctuation time and the effect flow (effect content) of the special figure variation effect. The type and number of special figure fluctuation patterns can be changed as appropriate.

The special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table is the type of special symbol (special figure 1 / special figure 2) that performs variable display to be judged, in other words, the starting port where a prize is given due to the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment. It can be associated with the type (first starting port 11 / second starting port 12). That is, in the special figure variation pattern determination table, the special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 11) used when performing the variable display of the special figure 1 and the variable display of the special figure 2 are displayed. There is a special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 12) used at the time of the operation.

Then, each special figure variation pattern determination table can be associated with a gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state). Specifically, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table is used in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table (non-time saving special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table) used in the non-time saving state and in the time saving state. There is a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table (special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for time saving). On the other hand, similarly, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table is also used in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table (non-time saving special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table) used in the non-time saving state and in the time saving state. There is a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table (special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for time saving).

Further, each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state) can be further associated with the jackpot determination result and the reach determination result. That is, the non-time-saving special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table have a jackpot, a reach loss, and a non-reach loss, respectively. Similarly, the non-time saving special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table and the time saving special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table also have a jackpot, a reach loss, and a non-reach loss, respectively.

Further, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for each reachless loss associated with the game state can also be associated with the special figure 1 hold number. For example, it is used when the special figure 1 hold number (U1) is 0 to 2 and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for loss without reach is used, and when the special figure 1 hold number (U1) is 3 to 4. There is a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for loss without reach. Similarly, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for each reachless loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the special figure 2 hold number. Specifically, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for loss without reach used when the special figure 2 hold number (U2) is 0 to 2, and the special figure 2 hold number (U2) when the special figure 2 hold number (U2) is 3 to 4. There is a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for loss without reach, which is used in the above.

Then, the special map display 81 performs the variation display of the special map of the special map variation time according to the special map variation pattern determined by each special map variation pattern determination. Then, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the display result of the special symbol variable display (result of the special symbol lottery) after the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the next special symbol is not immediately performed, and the next special symbol is subsequently displayed. , The jackpot game is executed.

Further, it is possible to associate each special figure variation pattern with an effect flow of the special figure variation effect as shown in the third column from the right in the table of FIGS. 11 to 12. Here, a typical effect constituting the effect flow of the special figure variation effect associated with the special figure variation pattern will be described.

There are normal fluctuation, reach, normal reach (N reach), long reach (L reach), special reach (SP reach), and battle production as the production that constitutes the production flow of the special figure fluctuation production.

The normal fluctuation suggests that the effect symbols that had been stopped and displayed started to change, and each of the effect symbols constituting each effect display fluctuated at a high speed to the extent that it was difficult to recognize, and the variable display of the special symbol was started. It is a production to do. Then, the special figure fluctuation effect (the part from the start of the change of the effect symbol to the stop of the change) related to the loss variation without reach and the part until the reach is established (determined) in the special figure change effect in which the reach occurs are usually changed. May consist of.

Immediately after the reach is established (fixed) through normal fluctuation, the N reach is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) at the position where, for example, the effect symbols constituting the reach are temporarily stopped, and the remaining one. This is a production in which the production symbol slows down and fluctuates at a lower speed than normal fluctuation. The jackpot expectation suggested by N reach is higher than normal fluctuations and lower than L reach and SP reach, which will be described later. When the special figure variation effect ends at N reach, the remaining one effect symbol that fluctuates at the low speed stops. In the case of loss, the remaining one effect symbol stops at an effect symbol different from the effect symbols constituting the reach. If the special symbol variation effect is not completed in N reach, the remaining one effect symbol changes at high speed again, and develops (switches) from N reach to L reach and SP reach while the reach is maintained.

The L reach can be executed at the time of a big hit or a loss, and is an effect suggesting whether or not the big hit game state is reached, and suggests that there is a possibility of the big hit game state. Furthermore, the L reach is, for example, an effect that can be performed after the N reach, which is performed for a longer time than the N reach, and suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the N reach. Even in the L reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols constituting the reach are reduced, and the predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 described later) that does not interfere with the background image is smaller than that in the N reach. At the upper left of the display unit 50a, the right effect symbol EZ3 is moved to the upper right of the display unit 50a), and the background image is switched to the background image dedicated to the L reach (the image dedicated to the L reach is played). In L reach, an animation image by 2DCG is mainly displayed on the display unit 50a. As the production content of L reach, a video of a scene different from the game related to SP reach, which will be described later, is displayed, such as the main character performing special training to learn a special move.

The SP reach can be executed at the time of a big hit or a loss, and is an effect suggesting whether or not the big hit game state is reached, and suggests that there is a possibility of the big hit game state. Furthermore, the SP reach is, for example, an effect that can be performed after the N reach, which is performed for a longer time than the L reach, and suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the L reach. Even in the SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols constituting the reach are reduced, and the predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 described later) that does not interfere with the background image is smaller than that in the N reach. At the upper left of the display unit 50a, the right effect symbol EZ3 is moved to the upper right of the display unit 50a), and the background image is switched to the background image dedicated to SP reach (the image dedicated to SP reach is played). In SP reach, a 3DCG image is mainly displayed on the display unit 50a. Then, as the production content of the SP reach, a video of a scene in which the team to which the hero character belongs and the team to which the rivals of the hero character belong play a match is displayed.

The battle effect is, for example, an effect that can be executed after reaching in a short time state, and is an effect that suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the normal fluctuation. Even in the battle effect, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols constituting the reach are reduced and the predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is on the upper left of the display unit 50a and the right effect symbol EZ3 is on the display unit 50a). In the state of moving to (upper right of), it switches to the background image dedicated to the battle production (the video dedicated to the battle production is played). Further, in the battle effect, the 3DCG image is mainly displayed on the display unit 50a.

In addition, in the "state in which the reach is maintained" in the N reach, the L reach, the SP reach, and the battle production, the effect symbols constituting the reach in the N reach, the L reach, the SP reach, and the battle production are displayed on the display unit 50a. Not only the state in which the image is visible in the display unit 50a, but also the state in which the effect symbols constituting the reach are difficult to see or cannot be seen from the display unit 50a for a predetermined period in relation to the dedicated background image, for example. In addition, the production contents of normal fluctuation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle production can be changed as appropriate. Further, the effects constituting the special figure variation effect are not limited to these, and can be added or reduced as appropriate.

Further, as shown in the second column from the right in the table of FIGS. 11 to 12, it is possible to give a name to the special figure fluctuation pattern by associating the jackpot determination result and the effect content of the special figure fluctuation effect. .. Then, the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the jackpot may be collectively referred to as "big hit fluctuation", and the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the loss may be collectively referred to as "loss fluctuation".

Furthermore, the special figure fluctuation pattern in which SP reach is performed regardless of the jackpot judgment result is "SP reach fluctuation", the special figure fluctuation pattern in which L reach is performed is "L reach fluctuation", and the special figure fluctuation in N reach. The special figure fluctuation pattern at which the production ends is sometimes collectively referred to as "N reach fluctuation". In addition, the loss fluctuation with reach is referred to as "loss fluctuation with reach", and the loss fluctuation without reach is sometimes collectively referred to as "normal loss fluctuation".

3-2-5. Pre-reading determination The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform pre-reading determination using, for example, a pre-reading determination table as shown in FIGS. 13 to 14 based on the acquired special figure-related determination information before performing jackpot determination. is there. The look-ahead judgment table shows the type of start port (first start port 11 / second start port 12) related to the start prize, in other words, the type of special figure (special figure 1 / special figure) that is variably displayed according to the start prize. It can be associated with 2). That is, in the look-ahead determination table, the first look-ahead determination table (FIG. 13) in the case where the first start port 11 is won and the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed, and the second start opening 12 is won, and the special figure 1 is given. There is a second look-ahead determination table (FIG. 14) when the variable display of 2 is performed. The look-ahead determination performed based on the first look-ahead determination table is also referred to as "first look-ahead determination", and the look-ahead determination performed based on the second look-ahead determination table is also referred to as "second look-ahead determination".

The look-ahead determination table can also be associated with a gaming state (normal gaming state / high-probability high-base gaming state / low-probability high-base gaming state), which will be described later. That is, the look-ahead judgment table includes a look-ahead judgment table (a look-ahead judgment table for a normal game state) used in a normal game state and a look-ahead judgment table (a high-probability high-base game) used in a high-probability high-base game state. There is a pre-reading determination table for a state) and a pre-reading determination table (a pre-reading determination table for a low-probability high-base gaming state) used in a low-probability high-base gaming state.

That is, the look-ahead determination table includes a first look-ahead determination table used in the normal gaming state, a first look-ahead determination table used in the high-probability high-base gaming state, and a low-probability high-base gaming state. The first look-ahead judgment table used, the second look-ahead judgment table used in the normal game state, the second look-ahead judgment table used in the high-probability high-base game state, and the low-probability high-base game state. There is a second look-ahead determination table used for.

By the look-ahead determination using the look-ahead determination table shown in FIGS. 13 to 14, the special figure variation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure performed by winning the starting ports 11 and 12 is specified. That is, the special figure variation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure is specified as the look-ahead determination result before the variable display of the special figure based on the prize is performed. In the process of specifying the special figure fluctuation pattern, the success or failure of the jackpot is also specified as the look-ahead judgment result.

Then, the look-ahead determination result including the information about the special figure fluctuation pattern and the like is associated with the start winning command. As will be described later, the start winning command is transmitted to the effect control board 120 as a look-ahead determination result as the start winning command is generated. It should be noted that what kind of information is specified as the look-ahead determination result can be appropriately changed. For example, information on the jackpot symbol type can also be included in the look-ahead determination result.

As described above, the special figure display 81 performs variable display of the special figure by performing the big hit determination, the big hit symbol type determination, the reach determination, and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination. Then, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the display result (result of the special symbol lottery) in the variable display of the special symbol, the next variable display of the special symbol is not performed, and the jackpot game is subsequently executed. Next, the jackpot game will be described.

3-3. Big hit game The big hit game consists of multiple round games that involve the opening and closing of the big winning opening 14, the opening (also referred to as OP) from the start of the big hit game to the start of the first round game, and the final round. It includes the ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the round game to the end of the jackpot game. Each round game begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ending.

It is possible not to provide OP or ED. Further, in the following, the round game of a predetermined number of times (predetermined order) is simply referred to as a "round". For example, the first round game is also called "1 round (1R)", and the 10th round game is also called "10 round (10R)".

Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 controls the jackpot game by using the jackpot game control table. The jackpot game control table can be set for each type of jackpot symbol. That is, it is possible to associate the jackpot game with the type of jackpot symbol. Then, one type or a plurality of types of jackpot games can be set.

The jackpot game control table stores elements (big hit game components) that make up the jackpot game. The jackpot game components include the number of round games, the number of times the big prize opening 14 is opened in each round game, the type and opening time (opening pattern) of the big winning opening where each opening is performed, and the time to close until the next opening. (Closed time), opening time (opening time), ending time (ending time), etc. are included.

Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can control the jackpot game by using, for example, the jackpot game control table as shown in FIG. 15 (A). That is, it is possible to set the type of the jackpot game and the jackpot game component for each jackpot game as shown in FIG. 15A. Here, the jackpot game set in FIG. 15A will be described.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol A (hereinafter, also referred to as "first jackpot game"), a round game is performed 10 times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 10R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the first big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the first big hit game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol B (hereinafter, also referred to as "second jackpot game"), a round game is performed five times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 5R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the second big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the second big hit game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol C (hereinafter, also referred to as "third jackpot game"), a round game is performed five times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 5R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the third big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the third big hit game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol D (hereinafter, also referred to as "fourth jackpot game"), a round game is performed 10 times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 10R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fourth big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fourth big hit game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol E (hereinafter, also referred to as "fifth jackpot game"), a round game is performed six times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 6R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fifth big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fifth big hit game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol F (hereinafter, also referred to as "sixth jackpot game"), a round game is performed six times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 6R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the sixth big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the sixth big hit game.

In each round game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is detected by the large winning opening sensor 14a, even before the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 14 elapses, it is large. The winning opening 14 is closed and the round game ends. In addition, the types and specific contents of the jackpot game components can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 15A, which type of jackpot game is executed is determined by the type of jackpot symbol, but the jackpot game is executed by a method different from this. You may do so. For example, a device capable of distributing to two winning openings is provided in the game area 6, and if one winning opening is won, only a jackpot game consisting of a predetermined number of round games is executed, while if the other winning opening is won, a predetermined number is specified. Either a jackpot game consisting of more than a number of round games or a jackpot game consisting of less than a predetermined number of round games may be executed with a predetermined probability by a lottery or the like.

3-4. Game state Next, a game state in which the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can be controlled will be described. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a jackpot game state in which the jackpot game is executed and a non-big hit game state in which the jackpot game is not executed. The non-big hit game state includes a normal game state, which is a basic base game state, and a specific game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Factors that are "advantageous to the player" related to this specific gaming state include the jackpot probability and the ease of opening the second starting port 12. That is, the jackpot probability and the ease of opening the second starting port 12 can be associated with the specific gaming state.

Regarding the jackpot probability, the advantage to the player is that the jackpot probability is higher than that in the normal gaming state, and it becomes easier to win the jackpot. Further, regarding the ease of opening the second starting port 12, the advantage to the player is that the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is higher than in the normal gaming state, and the opening of the second starting port 12 per unit time is higher. It means that the time will be longer.

Then, as the specific game state, both the jackpot probability and the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 are advantageous to the player, and the second specific game state in which only the jackpot probability is advantageous to the player. It is possible to set three types of a specific gaming state and a third specific gaming state in which only the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 is advantageous to the player. It is also possible to mount a part of the three types of specific gaming states without mounting all of these three types of specific gaming states on the pachinko gaming machine PY1.

Here, as a partial gaming state focusing on the jackpot probability, a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than that in the normal gaming state and the jackpot probability is advantageous to the player is referred to as a "high probability state". On the other hand, the jackpot probability is the normal probability in the normal gaming state, and the state in which the jackpot probability is not advantageous to the player is called the "normal probability state".

Further, as a partial gaming state focusing on the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is longer than that of the normal gaming state, and the second starting port 12 A state in which the ease of opening (the ease of opening the second starting port 12) is advantageous to the player is referred to as a "time saving state". On the other hand, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is the opening time in the normal gaming state, and the state in which the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is not advantageous to the player is "non-time saving". It is called "state".

Here, the non-time saving state and the time saving state will be described in detail. As described above, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time-saving state. That is, the time saving state is a state in which the second starting port 12 is more likely to win a prize than the non-time saving state. Here, a specific method for making it easier for the second starting port 12 to win a prize in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state will be described.

For example, by setting the time saving state to a state in which the fluctuation time of the normal figure is likely to be shorter than that in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier for the second starting port 12 to win a prize in the time saving state. For example, as described above, regardless of the result of the collision detection, the normal map fluctuation time (5.0 seconds) shorter than the normal map fluctuation time (30.0 seconds) determined in the non-time saving state is set in the time-shortened state. Let it be decided. As a result, the number of times the general drawing lottery is executed per unit time is larger in the time saving state. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time saving state and the time saving state, if the probability of winning in the collision detection and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game are the same, the general drawing lottery per unit time As the number of executions increases, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer.

Further, by setting the time saving state to a state in which the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer than that in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier for the second starting port 12 to win a prize in the time saving state. .. For example, as described above, in the non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D is released for 0.2 seconds in one auxiliary game, whereas in the time saving state, the electric chew 12D is 5.0 in total in one auxiliary game. Try to open for seconds. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time saving state and the time saving state, if the probability of winning in the collision detection and the normal figure fluctuation time are the same, the number of times the auxiliary game is executed per unit time becomes the same, so once. Since the opening time of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is long, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes long.

Further, by setting the time-saving state to a state in which it is easier to determine a hit in the hit determination than in the non-time-saving state, it is possible to make it easier for the second starting port 12 to win a prize in the time-saving state. For example, as described above, in the non-time saving state, the hit determination is determined to be a hit with a probability of 6600/65536, whereas in the time saving state, the hit determination is determined to be a hit with a probability of 59936/65536. .. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time saving state and the time saving state, if the opening time of the electric chew 12D and the fluctuation time of the normal figure in one auxiliary game are the same, the probability of being judged as a hit by the collision detection is high. Since the number of hit determinations per unit time increases, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes long.

In this way, the factors that make up the ease of opening in the time-saving state are the probability of winning in the hit determination (winning probability), the fluctuation time of the normal map, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game. .. In the time-saving state, it is easier to win than in the non-time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure is likely to be short, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be long. When the condition is satisfied, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state, and it is possible to easily win a prize in the second starting port 12. As a result, the so-called "base", which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of launched balls, becomes high. Therefore, in a short time state with a high base, it is possible to aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls possessed as compared with the normal game state. That is, it can be said that the time saving state is more advantageous for the player than the non-time saving state.

In the time saving state, not all three conditions for increasing the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 may be satisfied, but only some conditions may be satisfied. Finally, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer than in the non-time-saving state, and it is sufficient that the second starting port 12 can be easily won.

Further, in the time-saving state, the number of executions of the special figure variable display per unit time is small or special by making it easier to select the special figure fluctuation pattern having a shorter special figure fluctuation time than in the non-time saving state. The average of the fluctuation times in the figure may be low. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the special figure hold is digested becomes faster, and an effective prize (a prize that can be stored as a special figure hold) to the starting port is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

In the following, the first specific game state is referred to as a "high probability high base game state", and the second specific game state is referred to as a "high probability low" in relation to the content of the advantage to the player for each specific game state. The "base game state" and the third specific game state are also referred to as "low probability high base game state". Further, the normal gaming state is also referred to as a "low probability low base gaming state".

Therefore, it can be said that the low-probability low-base gaming state is a gaming state controlled in a normal probability state and a non-time saving state. Similarly, the low-probability high-base gaming state is controlled in the normal-probability state and time-saving state, the high-probability low-base gaming state is controlled in the high-probability state and non-time-saving state, and the high-probability high-base gaming state is controlled in the high-probability state and time-saving state. It can be said that the game is in a state of being.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can be controlled in a low-probability low-base gaming state, a low-probability high-base gaming state, a high-probability low-base gaming state, a high-probability high-base gaming state, and a jackpot gaming state. In the jackpot game state, the jackpot 14 is open for a long time and a large amount of game balls can be acquired. Therefore, the jackpot game state can also be said to be a game state advantageous to the player. Therefore, the jackpot game state and the specific game state can be said to be "advantageous game states" that are more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

The high-probability high-base game state and the high-probability low-base game state are more advantageous to the player than the low-probability low-base game state in that the jackpot probability is higher than the normal probability state. is there. Further, the high-probability high-base gaming state and the low-probability high-base gaming state are more advantageous to the player than the low-probability low-base gaming state in that the ease of winning the second starting port 12 is higher than that in the non-time saving state. It is in a gaming state. Furthermore, in the jackpot game state, the jackpot game state is a low-probability low-base game because the first start opening 11 and the big prize opening 14 in which the number of prize balls by one winning is larger than the second start opening 12 are opened. It is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the state.

Further, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is turned on, the normal gaming state is first set. In addition, the jackpot game state is set by displaying the stop display of the jackpot symbol. On the other hand, the specific game state is set by winning the big hit and executing the big hit game. Next, the setting of the specific gaming state will be described.

3-5. Setting of specific gaming state The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can newly set a specific gaming state with the end of the jackpot game. That is, after the jackpot game, the game can be controlled and advanced in a specific game state. The duration of this specific gaming state can be set as appropriate. For example, the specific game state can be continued until the next big hit is won. It is also possible to limit the period during which the specific gaming state can be continued.

When limiting the duration of the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state can be terminated when the termination condition for the duration is satisfied. Then, when the specific gaming state ends, the normal gaming state can be set. Further, regarding the high-probability high-base game state, when the end condition is satisfied, the low-probability high-base game state or the high-probability low-base game state can be set. In this case, the newly set low-probability high-base gaming state or high-probability low-base gaming state may be continued until the next big hit is won. Further, the same or different end conditions may be set for the newly set low-probability high-base game state or high-probability low-base game state, and when the end condition is satisfied, the normal game state may be set.

In addition, the end condition for the duration of the specific gaming state can be set as appropriate. As the end condition, for example, the number of times the special figure variable display is executed can be set. In addition, the number of times the special figure variable display is executed is not limited to the elapsed time after the jackpot game, the number of balls launched after the jackpot game, the number of passages to the gate 13 after the jackpot game, or whether to end the specific game state. It is possible to set the end condition to derive the result of ending in the lottery of whether or not (so-called "fall lottery"). Further, these elements may be set individually as the end condition, or may be set in combination.

Note that these end conditions may be set to be the same for all specific game states that can be set after the jackpot game, or for some specific game states that can be set. You may. Further, the end condition may be different for each specific game state.

Further, the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence / absence of the end condition, and the content of the end condition can be associated with the jackpot symbol type related to the jackpot game. For example, when the jackpot symbol type is set as described above, as shown in FIG. 15B, the high-probability high-base game is performed after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol A, the jackpot symbol B, and the jackpot symbol D is completed. The game may be controlled in the state. Here, this high-probability, high-base game state can be continued until a big hit is won without setting an end condition. Further, after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol C and the jackpot symbol E is completed, the game may be controlled in the low probability and high base game state. Here, an end condition can be set for this low-probability high-base game state, and the special figure variable display can be set 100 times as the end condition. The relationship between the jackpot type symbol and the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence or absence of the end condition, and the content of the end condition is an example, and is not limited to this.

In addition, paying attention to the game profit of the jackpot, the jackpot in which the game progresses in a high probability state after the jackpot game is also called "high probability jackpot". Further, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a high probability state and a short time state after the jackpot game is also referred to as a "probability variation jackpot". In addition, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a normal probability state and a time-saving state after the jackpot game is also referred to as a "time-saving jackpot".

4. Main effects by the gaming machine Next, the main effects performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 30.

4-1. Production mode First, the production mode will be described. The production mode is a division (or a higher-level conceptual attribute) of the production. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can set a customer waiting effect mode, a normal effect mode, a probability variation effect mode, a time saving effect mode, and a jackpot effect mode as the effect modes.

In the customer waiting effect mode, the special figure variable display is performed in "low probability low base game state", "low probability high base game state", "high probability low base game state" and "high probability high base game state". This is an effect mode that can be set when there is no special figure and indicates that the standby state is in the state where the variable display of the special figure is not performed. The customer waiting effect is performed when the customer waiting effect mode is set. In the customer waiting effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 16A, a customer waiting demo video G100 introducing the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is displayed on the display unit 50a. Further, when the first effect button 40k is operated while the customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed, the setting screen G101 for making settings related to the effect of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 as shown in FIG. 16 (B). Is displayed. The settings related to the effect include a volume setting of the sound output from the speaker 52, a brightness setting of the display unit 50a, a frequency setting of the effect to be executed, and the like. It should be noted that the setting items related to the effect can be set as appropriate. It is also possible to prevent the setting screen G101 from being displayed by the player's operation from the customer waiting demo video G100.

The normal effect mode can be set in the "low probability low base game state", and is an effect mode indicating that the game is in the normal game state. Further, a plurality of lower production modes belonging to the normal production mode can be provided. For example, as the lower layer effect mode belonging to the normal effect mode, a first normal effect mode, a second normal effect mode, a third normal effect mode, and the like can be provided.

In the following, the production mode of the lower hierarchy belonging to the production mode is also referred to as a “production stage”. Along with this, the first normal production mode is also referred to as the "first normal production stage", the second normal production mode is also referred to as the "second normal production stage", and the third normal production mode is also referred to as the "third normal production stage". Say. Unless there are special circumstances, basically, the production mode set when the special figure variation display is first started after the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is turned on is the first normal production stage ( It is assumed that it is the first normal production mode). However, the type of the effect mode initially set is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

When a plurality of production stages belonging to the normal production mode are provided in this way, the production stages can be repeatedly switched in order when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. The switching condition can be set as appropriate, but for example, the switching condition can be set so that the special figure variable effect is performed a predetermined number of times without winning a big hit. Further, as the switching condition, it is possible to set that a specific effect such as a special figure variation effect based on the SP reach loss variation is executed.

In addition, as will be described later, a reach may occur in the special figure variation effect, but the special figure variation effect is established for the entire section of the special figure variation effect when the reach does not occur, and the reach when the reach occurs. It can be divided into a front part before the operation and a rear part after the reach is established when the reach occurs. The first part is composed of the above-mentioned "normal fluctuation".

Then, in the front stage portion of the first normal effect stage, a background image (FIG. 17 (A): first normal background image G111) mainly representing the scenery of the city is displayed on the display unit 50a. In the front stage portion of the second normal production stage, a background image (FIG. 17 (B): second normal background image G112) mainly representing the ground of the baseball field is displayed on the display unit 50a. In the front stage portion of the third normal effect stage, a background image (FIG. 17 (C): third normal background image G113) mainly representing the inside of the restaurant is displayed on the display unit 50a. On the other hand, in the latter part of the first normal effect stage to the third normal effect stage, the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, and the third normal background image G113 are not displayed, and the normal effect mode is used. A dedicated background image is displayed according to the type of reach.

The dedicated background image according to the type of reach in the normal production mode may be a background image common to the normal production mode regardless of the type of the production stage, or may be a different background image for each production stage.

Further, the normal effect mode can be set even in the "high probability low base game state", and the normal effect mode may be an effect mode indicating that the non-time saving state is set. Alternatively, a predetermined effect mode that is set only in the "high probability low base game state" and is different from the normal effect mode may be provided. Further, in the low-probability low-base gaming state and the high-probability low-base gaming state that occur under certain conditions, a predetermined effect mode different from the normal effect mode may be set.

The probability variation effect mode can be set in the "high probability high base game state", and is an effect mode indicating that the state is a high probability high base game state. In the first stage portion of the probability variation effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17D, a background image (probability variation background image G120) representing the universe is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the probability variation BGM is output from the speaker 52. .. Further, in the latter part of the probabilistic effect mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the probabilistic effect mode is displayed.

The time saving effect mode can be set in the "low probability high base game state", and is an effect mode indicating that the time saving state is set. In the first stage portion of the time saving effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17 (E), a background image (time saving background image G130) representing the sky is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the time saving BGM is output from the speaker 52. .. Further, in the latter part of the time saving effect mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the time saving effect mode is displayed.

The time saving effect mode is set in the low probability high base game state and the high probability high base game state, and is either the low probability high base game state or the high probability high base game state, and is at least the time saving state. It is also possible to set the production mode to indicate that.

Further, for any or one of the probabilistic effect mode and the time saving effect mode, a plurality of effect stages for the effect mode are further provided as in the normal effect mode, and the effect stage is switched when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. You can do it.

The jackpot effect mode is an effect mode that can be set when a jackpot game is being performed in the "big hit game state", and is an effect mode indicating that the jackpot game is being performed. In the jackpot effect mode, for example, during the opening of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18A, the display unit 50a has an opening image G1 suggesting the start of the jackpot game and a right-handed image G2 prompting "right-handed". Is displayed. The jackpot opening effect is performed. In addition, during the opening, as a jackpot opening effect, a background image (opening background image G200) corresponding to the type of jackpot game is displayed on the display unit 50a as the background of the opening image G1 and the right-handed image G2. ..

Further, in the jackpot effect mode, during the round game in the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18B, the right-handed image G2 is continuously displayed from the opening on the display unit 50a, and the round image showing the number of rounds is displayed. A round effect is performed in which the prize ball number image G4 suggesting the G3 and the number of prize balls paid out is displayed. In addition, during the round game, as a round effect, on the display unit 50a, the background of the right-handed image G2, the round image G3, and the prize ball number image G4 is used as a background image according to the type of the jackpot game (round background). Image G201) is displayed, and BGM corresponding to the type of jackpot game is output from the speaker 52.

Further, during the ending in the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18C, the display unit 50a suggests the ending image G5 suggesting the effect mode set after the jackpot game and the total number of prize balls paid out. The jackpot ending effect in which the total prize ball number image G6 is displayed is performed. In addition, during the ending, as a jackpot ending effect, a background image (ending background image G202) corresponding to the type of jackpot game is displayed on the display unit 50a as the background of the ending image G5 and the total prize ball number image G6. Will be done.

In the following, the jackpot opening effect, the round effect, and the jackpot ending effect are collectively referred to as a "big hit game effect" as an effect executed in the jackpot game. That is, the jackpot game effect is performed in the jackpot effect mode.

4-2. Special figure fluctuation effect Next, the special figure variation effect will be described. When the variable display of the special figure is started, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a special figure fluctuation pattern and a special figure lottery result (big hit judgment result, big hit symbol type judgment result, reach judgment result, and The special figure fluctuation effect is executed based on the special figure fluctuation pattern determination result) and the like.

In the special figure variation effect, the display unit 50a superimposes the variation display of the effect symbol on the predetermined background image. In the variable display of the effect symbol, it stops after the effect symbol changes. That is, after the special symbol fluctuation time and the variation display of the effect symbol are performed, the variation is stopped and the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, basically, the result of the special figure lottery is notified by the stop display of the effect symbol.

In the special figure variation effect performed by the display unit 50a, it is possible to use an image other than the variation display of the effect symbol. Further, in addition to the image display device 50 including the display unit 50a, various effect devices such as a speaker 52, a frame lamp 53, a panel movable device 55, a first effect button device 40, and a second effect button device 41 are used. It is possible to perform a figure variation effect.

Next, in the special figure variation effect executed in response to the special figure variable display, the effect symbol displayed on the display unit 50a will be described. The effect symbol is also identification information for showing the result of the special figure lottery, and a plurality of types are provided. Specifically, one of the constituent elements of the effect symbol constitutes identification information for indicating the special figure lottery result, and a plurality of types of effect symbols are provided depending on the difference in the identification information.

For example, as shown in FIG. 19A, the effect symbols may be composed of numbers 1 to 9, and nine effect symbols may be provided. Then, the effect symbol including the number "1" is designated as the effect symbol G10a. Similarly, the effect symbols including the numbers "2" to "9" are referred to as the effect symbols G10b to the effect symbols G10e. For convenience, when individual production symbols are handled without distinction, they are collectively referred to as "production design G10".

In addition, the numerical parts of the production symbols G10c and G10g related to "3" and "7" are red, and "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8", and The number portions of the effect symbols G10a, G10b, G10d, G10e, G10f, G10h, and G10i of "9" are blue. That is, colors are included in the components of the effect symbol G10. The configuration of the effect symbol G10 and what the identification information is set to may be appropriately changed. For example, other components such as a character associated with each number may be added to the effect symbol G10.

Subsequently, the effect symbol display area for displaying the effect symbol G10 will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 19B, the left side, the center, and the right side of the display unit 50a divided into three substantially evenly in the horizontal direction are the left effect symbol area 50b1, the middle effect symbol area 50b2, and the right effect symbol. The region can be 50b3. The effect symbol G10 is displayed in any of the left effect symbol area 50b1, the middle effect symbol area 50b2, and the right effect symbol area 50b3.

Then, mainly, in the front stage portion of the special symbol variation effect, the effect symbol G10 displayed in the left effect symbol area 50b1 is collectively referred to as "left effect symbol EZ1", and the effect symbol G10 displayed in the middle effect symbol area 50b2 is referred to. The effect symbol G10 displayed in the right effect symbol area 50b3 is collectively referred to as "right effect symbol EZ3". That is, in the left effect symbol area 50b1, the middle effect symbol area 50b2, and the right effect symbol area 50b3, the effect symbol G10 consisting of numbers 1 to 9 is commonly displayed, but the effect symbols are displayed at relative display positions. When distinguishing G10, it is described as a left effect symbol EZ1, a middle effect symbol EZ2, and a right effect symbol EZ3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, it is possible to provide a small symbol area 50c for variably displaying a small symbol in a section at the left end (lower left corner) of the lower end portion of the display unit 50a. In the small symbol area 50c, the small symbol can be variably displayed according to the variable display of the special symbol. The design of the small symbol can be set as appropriate, but for example, the numerical portion of the effect symbol G10 can be reduced as it is.

In FIG. 19B, the left effect symbol area 50b1, the middle effect symbol area 50b2, the right effect symbol area 50b3, and the small symbol area 50c are clearly indicated by a alternate long and short dash line. It is described to represent the range of the middle effect symbol area 50b2, the right effect symbol area 50b3, and the small symbol area 50c, and is not actually displayed.

Further, as described above, as the effects constituting the effect flow of the special figure variation effect, there are normal variation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle effect. Here, some of these will be described.

4-2-1. The normal fluctuation pachinko gaming machine PY1 can first perform normal fluctuation in the special figure fluctuation production. The normal fluctuation functions as an effect suggesting that the variable display of the special figure has started. Next, the normal fluctuation will be specifically described. As the small symbols, the left small symbol EZ1, the medium effect symbol EZ2, and the left small symbol KZ1, the small and medium-sized symbol KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 corresponding to the right effect symbol EZ3 are variably displayed in the small symbol area 50c.

For example, as shown in FIG. 20A, the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed on the display unit 50a, and the left small symbol KZ1, the medium and small symbols KZ2, and the right small are displayed. When the variable display of the special figure is started from the state where the symbol KZ3 is stopped and the variable display of the special figure is not performed and the variable display of the special figure is waiting, FIG. 20 (B) As shown in, the special figure variation effect is started with the start. Specifically, the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the left small symbol KZ1, the small and medium-sized symbol KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 is started.

It is possible to make the display mode of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 different from the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. For example, the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed by scrolling the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 from the top to the bottom of the display unit 50a, and the variation display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed by displaying each small symbol KZ1 to KZ3. It may be replaced one after another at a fixed position. The display mode of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 may be the same.

Further, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are variablely displayed at high speed immediately after the start of the variable display. While the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are displayed in a variable manner at high speed, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are basically images of the background side such as the background images G111 to G114. Is displayed with transparency that is easy to see.

Then, if the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the special figure fluctuation pattern of the loss without reach (for example, the normal loss fluctuation), the variable display of the special figure ends without the reach occurring (special figure). (Stop display), the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed with the loss stitches (so-called “separate stitches”) peculiar to the loss without reach.

Toward the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, for example, first, as shown in FIG. 20 (C), the left effect symbol EZ1 temporarily stops at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and then is shown in FIG. 20 (D). As shown in FIG. 20 (E), the right effect symbol EZ3 temporarily stops at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and further, as shown in FIG. 20 (E), the middle effect symbol EZ2 temporarily stops at a substantially central position in the vertical direction.

Finally, as shown in FIG. 20 (F), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which are temporarily stopped in a state of being lined up in the horizontal direction at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, are completely stopped all at once, and the stop is stopped. Confirm (stop display of effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed). When the temporarily stopped effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are completely stopped at different points, that is, when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the three small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 become the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. The small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are also stopped and displayed at the same time.

In the example of FIG. 20, when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of the left effect symbol EZ1 → the right effect symbol EZ3 → the middle effect symbol EZ2, but the effect temporarily stops. The aspect is not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate.

4-2-2. Reach Next, the establishment of reach will be explained. Even when the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the special figure fluctuation pattern of the loss with reach (for example, the N loss fluctuation), basically, as in the case of no reach described above, the display unit 50a As shown in FIG. 21 (A), the variable display of the special figure is started from the state where the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed. As shown in B), the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 starts, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 starts.

Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, as shown in FIG. 21 (C), the left effect symbol EZ1 according to the number "5" temporarily stops at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and then is shown in FIG. 21 (D). As described above, the right effect symbols EZ3 related to the same number "5" are temporarily stopped side by side in the horizontal direction at substantially the center position in the vertical direction, and the reach is established. Even if the reach is established in the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is continuously performed.

Further, in the example of FIG. 21, when the reach is established, the effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of the left effect symbol EZ1 → the right effect symbol EZ3. Can be done. In addition, the numbers of the production symbols that make up the reach are not limited to "5". Further, the position of temporary stop is not limited to the substantially central position in the vertical direction. Further, the direction in which the effect symbols constituting the reach are arranged is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be another direction such as an oblique direction.

In this way, the entire period of the special figure variation effect when there is no reach loss and the section from the start of the special figure variation effect when reach occurs to the time when the reach is established can be set as normal variation. However, the time until the reach is established can be appropriately set based on the special figure fluctuation pattern and the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute various notice effects such as so-called "pseudo-ren", cut-in notice, and dialogue notice until the reach is established. Alternatively, it is possible to enter the so-called "zone" before the reach is established.

4-2-3. The N-reach pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform N-reach when the reach is established after the normal fluctuation. The N reach is a production that suggests that the lottery result of the special drawing lottery may have been a "big hit", and functions as a production for making the player expect a big hit. Next, N reach will be specifically described.

When the reach is established, for example, as shown in FIG. 21 (D), N reach is performed from that point. In N reach, as shown in FIG. 22 (A), the state when the reach is established is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When the N reach is started, as shown in FIG. 22 (B), the medium effect symbol EZ2, which is displaying (scrolling) at high speed in the normal mode, gradually decelerates.

If the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the special figure fluctuation pattern of loss with reach (for example, N loss fluctuation), the middle effect symbol EZ2 temporarily stops at a substantially central position in the vertical direction from the state where the reach is established. Then, the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is performed. At this time, since the reach is established, as shown in FIG. 22 (C-1), a medium effect symbol composed of numbers different from the numbers constituting the reach (“4” in FIG. 22 (C-1)). EZ2 temporarily stops. Then, with the end of the variable display of the special figure (stop display of the special figure), as shown in FIG. 22 (D), the temporary stop state becomes a complete stop state, and the loss is peculiar to the loss with reach. The left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed.

Further, when the temporarily stopped effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are completely stopped at a loss peculiar to the loss with reach, that is, when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the three small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 However, they are stopped all at once with the same loss eyes peculiar to the loss with reach as the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also performed. The contents of N reach can be changed or added as appropriate.

When the special figure variation effect does not end at N reach, as shown in FIG. 22 (C-2), the remaining one medium effect symbol EZ2 that has not stopped fluctuates again at high speed, and N while the reach is maintained. It may develop (switch) from reach to L reach or SP reach.

4-2-4. The L-reach pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform L-reach after N-reach. The L reach is an effect that suggests that the possibility that the result of the special drawing lottery is a "big hit" is higher than that of the N reach, and functions as an effect for the player to expect a big hit. Although the established reach is maintained even in the L reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 23 (A), at the start of the L reach, the effect symbols EZ1 and EZ3 constituting the reach are reduced and displayed. The left effect symbol EZ1 moves to a predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is on the upper left of the display unit 50a, and the right effect symbol EZ3 is on the upper right of the display unit 50a) in the unit 50a so as not to overlap the small symbol area 50c.

Further, at the start of the L reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 23A, a background image dedicated to the L reach (background image G114 for the L reach) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The background image G114 for L reach is composed of a moving image developed by a predetermined story. The content of the story of the moving image related to the background image G114 for L reach can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, the main character confesses to the girl.

When the background image G114 for L reach is displayed, it starts from a scene where the main character is waiting for a girl at a meeting place as shown in FIG. 23 (A). Then, as shown in FIG. 23 (B), a girl appears at the meeting place. At this time, at substantially the center of the display unit 50a, the production symbol of the number "5" constituting the reach and the production symbol of the number "4" not constituting the reach appear as the middle production symbol EZ2. Then, it slowly rotates so that it comes out from the back side to the front side and then returns to the back side.

While the production symbol of the number "4" and the production symbol of the number "5" are continuously rotated, the story related to the background image G114 for L reach progresses. Then, as shown in FIG. 23 (C), the hero character confesses to the girl. At this time, at the substantially center of the display unit 50a, the effect symbol of the number "5" that constitutes the reach and the effect symbol of the number "4" that does not constitute the reach will mutually repel the opponent. Collide with each other. Since the production symbol of the number "5" constitutes the reach and the production design of the number "4" does not constitute the reach, the production design of the number "4" is skipped and the production design of the number "5" is If it remains, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 showing the jackpot is established, while the effect symbol of the number "5" is skipped and the effect symbol of the number "4" remains, the effect of the aspect showing the reach loss. The stop display of the symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is established. Therefore, the scene of FIG. 23C is the final phase of the L reach, and the effect suggesting a big hit (big hit suggestion effect) is executed or the effect suggesting a loss (loss suggestion effect) is executed. It constitutes a branch point that branches into a crab (so-called "winning branch point").

When the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the jackpot fluctuation (L jackpot fluctuation) at the hit turning point, as shown in FIG. 24 (A-1), a smiling girl is up on the display unit 50a. After being displayed, as shown in FIG. 24 (B-1), after a smiling girl showing the hero character who is happy to succeed in confession is displayed in close-up, in FIG. 24 (B-1). As shown, the main character who is happy to succeed in confession is displayed, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52. At this time, along with the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 of the number "5" constituting the reach, the middle effect symbol EZ2 of the number "5" constituting the reach is temporarily stopped at the center of the display unit 50a. Displayed in mode. That is, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit.

The display of the main character who is happy to succeed in confession and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitute a jackpot suggestion effect. After the jackpot suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 24 (C-1), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner showing the jackpot.

On the other hand, if the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the loss variation with reach (L loss variation) after the hitting branch point, the large hit suggestion effect is not performed, and the background image G114 for L reach shows the figure. As shown in FIG. 24 (A-2), after a girl with a sad expression is displayed up on the display unit 50a, as shown in FIG. 24 (B-2), she fails to confess and is disappointed. The main character is displayed. At this time, along with the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 of the number "5" constituting the reach, the middle effect symbol EZ2 of the number "5" not constituting the reach is temporarily stopped at the center of the display unit 50a. Is displayed. That is, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating reach loss.

The display of the hero character who is discouraged after failing to confess constitutes a loss suggestion effect. After the loss suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 24 (C-2), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed at the loss stitches for reach.

4-2-5. SP Reach In addition, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform SP reach after N reach. The SP reach is an effect that suggests that the possibility that the result of the special drawing lottery is a "big hit" is higher than that of the L reach, and functions as an effect for the player to expect a big hit. Although the established reach is maintained even in the SP reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (A), at the start of the SP reach, the effect symbols EZ1 and EZ3 constituting the reach are reduced and displayed. The left effect symbol EZ1 moves to a predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is on the upper left of the display unit 50a, and the right effect symbol EZ3 is on the upper right of the display unit 50a) in the unit 50a so as not to overlap the small symbol area 50c.

Further, at the start of SP reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (A), a background image dedicated to SP reach (background image G115 for SP reach) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The background image G115 for SP reach is composed of a moving image in which a predetermined story develops. The content of the story of the video related to the background image G115 for SP reach can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, the main character and the enemy character, which is a rival of the main character, confront each other. ing. The main character is a baseball pitcher, and the enemy character is a baseball batter, who face each other in a baseball game as a pitcher and a batter.

When the background image G115 for SP reach is displayed, an enemy character first appears as shown in FIG. 25 (A), and then, as shown in FIG. 25 (B), in the center of the display unit 50a. An image (SP reach start title image) G11 indicating that the SP reach has been started is displayed. The SP reach start title image G11 is composed of a title image G11a representing the title of the SP reach "" Shoot the enemy batter XX !! "in FIG. 25 (B)" and an effect image G11b that enhances the title image G11a. To.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (C), a scene in which the main character and the enemy character are facing each other is displayed. After that, in the background image G115 for SP reach, the main character throws the ball as shown in FIG. 26 (A), and the ball advances toward the enemy character as shown in FIG. 26 (B). As shown in C), the enemy character begins to swing the bat. Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (D), the ball and the bat approach each other, and the confrontation between the main character and the enemy character is about to be settled. This scene constitutes a turning point (winning turning point) in which the main character wins in the confrontation between the pitcher and the batter and a big hit is suggested or a defeat is suggested and a loss is suggested.

After this hit turning point, if the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the jackpot fluctuation (SP jackpot fluctuation), as shown in FIG. 27 (A-1), the enemy character misses the display unit 50a. After winning the confrontation, as shown in Fig. 27 (B-1), the main character who strikes out the enemy character and screams on the mound is displayed, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52. Will be done. At this time, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit.

The display of the main character who wins the confrontation and screams, and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitute a jackpot suggestion effect. After the jackpot suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-1), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner showing the jackpot.

On the other hand, if the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the reach loss fluctuation (SP loss fluctuation) after the hitting branch point, the jackpot suggestion effect is not performed, and the background image G115 for SP reach shows FIG. 27 ( As shown in A-2), the enemy character hits a home run and loses the confrontation, and as shown in FIG. 27 (B-2), the main character is disappointed on the mound. At this time, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating reach loss.

The display of the hero character who is defeated in the confrontation and is disappointed constitutes a loss suggestion production. After the loss suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-2), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed at the loss stitches for reach.

Next, the movable body effect and the operation effect performed in the special figure variation effect will be described. Movable body production and operation production are independent of these productions when they are performed as part of these productions in the form of being incorporated into the above-mentioned SP reach, L reach, N reach, and even the jackpot game production. May be done. First, the movable body production will be described.

4-3. Movable body effect The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform a movable body effect that involves the movement of the movable body at a predetermined timing in a predetermined effect such as a special figure variation effect or a jackpot game effect. The movable body effect is an effect using a movable device such as a board movable device 55, and functions as an effect suggesting a jackpot expectation and development to SP reach.

For example, when the movable body effect functions as an effect suggesting the development to SP reach, as shown in FIG. 28 (A), when developing from N reach to SP reach in the special figure variation effect, first of all, FIG. 28. As shown in (B), the board movable device 55 operates, the board movable body 55k descends to the operating position in front view, and is held at that position for a predetermined time. Further, at this time, the effect image G13 accompanying the operation of the board movable body 55k is also displayed on the entire display unit 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 28C, the effect image G13 is erased, the board movable body 55k rises to the standby position, and the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state. When the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state, it develops into SP reach. The operation content of the movable device in the movable body effect can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-4. Operation effect Next, the operation effect will be described. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 has an operation promotion effect and an operation result effect according to an operation of the first effect button 40k, the second effect button 41k, etc. at a predetermined timing in a predetermined effect such as a special figure variation effect or a jackpot game effect. It is possible to perform an operation effect including. The operation promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to operate the operation means, and the operation result effect is an effect that is performed in response to the operation of the operation means in the operation promotion effect. Functions as a production.

For example, as described above, when the winning branch point is reached in L reach or SP reach, a period during which the pressing operation of the first effect button 40k is valid (first effect button operation valid period) occurs, and this first effect button As the operation valid period occurs, as shown in FIG. 29 (A), an effect that encourages the operation of the first effect button 40k (first effect button operation promotion effect) is performed.

In the first effect button operation promotion effect, the first effect button operation promotion effect image G12 is displayed on the display unit 50a. The first effect button operation promotion effect image G12 is an image (operation target image) G12a representing the first effect button 40k, which is an operation target, and an image (pressing operation) representing an operation mode (that is, pressing operation) of the first effect button 40k. Operation image) G12b and an image (first effect button operation valid period remaining time image) G12c showing the remaining time of the operation valid period (first effect button operation valid period) related to the operation of the first effect button 40k are included. ..

The first effect button operation valid period remaining time image G12c is composed of a generally curved progress bar so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the first effect button operation valid period with the passage of time. Changes to. Note that FIG. 29B shows a state in which the first effect button operation valid period has occurred and one-third of the first effect button operation valid time has elapsed.

Then, when the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a jackpot fluctuation (SP jackpot fluctuation), after the first effect button 40k is pressed during the first effect button operation valid period, or after the first effect button is pressed, or the first effect button The operation result effect is performed after the remaining time of the first effect button operation valid period is exhausted without the first effect button 40k being operated during the operation valid period.

As an operation result effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (C), the board movable device 55 is operated, the board movable body 55k is lowered to the operating position, held at that position for a predetermined time, and the rotating member 55k1 is produced. Rotates for a predetermined time. In this way, the operation result effect also includes the movable body effect. Further, at this time, as an operation result effect, the effect image G13 accompanying the operation of the board movable body 55k is displayed on the entire display unit 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 29 (D), the effect image G13 is erased, the rotation of the rotating member 55k1 is stopped, and the board movable body 55k is raised, so that the operation result production is completed. When the operation result production is completed, a jackpot suggestion production is performed.

On the other hand, if the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the reach loss fluctuation (SP loss fluctuation), even if the first effect button 40k is pressed during the first effect button operation valid period, or the first effect button Even if the remaining time of the effect button operation valid period is exhausted without the 40k being pressed, the operation result effect is not performed and the loss suggestion effect is performed.

The operation result effect is not limited to the operation of the panel movable device 55 and the display of the effect image G13, and can be changed or added as appropriate. In addition, the operation effect is not limited to the special figure variation effect, but can also be executed in the jackpot effect.

4-5. Look-ahead effect Next, a look-ahead effect that can be executed before the variable display of the special figure, which is the target of the special figure hold, is executed will be described. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform a look-ahead effect for the special figure 1 hold or the special figure 2 hold for which the jackpot determination has not been performed, based on the result of the look-ahead determination at an arbitrary timing of the special figure variation effect. .. The look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit for the special figure 1 hold or the special figure 2 hold, and functions as an effect that makes the big hit expected even before the variable display of the special figure corresponding to the hold. As an example of the look-ahead effect, there is a hold change notice using a hold effect indicating a special figure hold. Here, the hold effect performed in the normal effect mode and the hold change notice will be described.

As shown in FIG. 30A, the hold effect is performed in the hold display area 50d formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a substantially central section at the lower end of the display unit 50a. The hold display area 50d is composed of a first area 50d1, a second area 50d2, a third area 50d3, and a fourth area 50d4, which are obtained by dividing the hold display area 50d into four substantially evenly in the left-right direction. That is, in the hold display area 50d, the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are provided side by side in order from the left end to the right end.

In the first region 50d1, the special figure 1 variable display occurs first among the reserved special figure 1 holds, and the special figure 1 variable display is the first line based on the special figure 1 related random number corresponding to the special figure 1 hold. The hold icon indicating the special figure 1 hold is displayed. Similarly, in the second region 50d2 to the fourth region 50d4, it occurs second to fourth in the reserved special figure 1 hold, and is based on the special figure 1 related random number corresponding to the special figure 1 hold. The hold icon representing the special figure 1 hold on which the special figure 1 variable display is performed is displayed in the 2nd to 4th positions.

In the following, the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first area 50d1 is referred to as "special figure 1 hold in the hold order 1". Similarly, the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the hold icons displayed in the second area 50d2, the third area 50d3, and the fourth area 50d4 is referred to as "special figure 1 hold in hold order 2" and "hold order 3". It is referred to as "Special Figure 1 Hold" and "Special Figure 1 Hold in Hold Order 4". That is, the existing special figure 1 hold is referred to as "hold order 1" to "hold order 4" in the order of occurrence.

Further, the variable display area 50e is formed on the left side of the hold display area 50d. In the variation display area 50e, the icon representing the currently executing special figure 1 variation display is displayed. Therefore, the target indicated by the icon displayed in the variable display area 50e is different from the target indicated by the hold icon displayed in the hold display area 50d. Is not included, but since the display of the hold icon and the display of the icon are related, in the following, the display of the hold icon and the display of the icon are collectively referred to as "hold effect". .. In addition, the hold icon and the icon are collectively referred to as an "icon". Further, the running special figure 1 variation display indicated by the icon is also referred to as “the variation”.

In FIG. 30A, the reserved display area 50d and the variable display area 50e are indicated by a single-dot chain line, and the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are indicated by a broken line. It is described to represent the range of the first region 50d1 to the fourth region 50d4 and the variable display region 50e, and is not actually displayed.

Next, a specific example of the hold effect will be described. In the following description, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 will be omitted. As a premise, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is being displayed (the special figure variation is being produced), and the special figure 1 hold number (U1) is "2". Under this circumstance, as shown in FIG. 30 (B), in the above-mentioned first area 50d1 (not shown), the special figure 1 hold (holding order) that occurred first among the currently held special figure 1 holds. The hold icon HA2 representing the special figure 1 hold of 1 is displayed, and in the above-mentioned second area 50d2 (not shown), the special figure 1 hold (hold order 2) that occurs after the special figure 1 hold represented by the hold icon HA2 is displayed. The hold icon HA3 indicating the special figure 1 hold) is displayed. Further, in the above-mentioned variation display area 50e (not shown), the icon HA1 representing the currently executing special figure 1 variation display is displayed. The display mode of the icons HA1 to HA3 displayed in FIG. 30B is a normal mode.

As described above, in the hold effect, the hold display area 50d is displayed side by side from the left end to the right in the order in which the special figure 1 hold occurs. That is, the variable display of the reserved special symbol, in other words, the variable display of the unexecuted special symbol based on the special symbol-related determination information stored in the special symbol reservation storage unit 105, is individually displayed by the hold icon. To.

Then, as shown in FIG. 30C, when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the icon HA1 representing the special figure variation display that is being executed until immediately before that is deleted. Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbol (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 hold representing the hold icon HA2, the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 shift. Specifically, the hold icon HA2 displayed in the first area 50d1 (not shown) moves to the variable display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA3 displayed in the second area 50d2 (not shown) is not shown. Move to the first region 50d1 shown. That is, the displayed hold icon HA2 and hold icon HA3 are shifted to the left by one each. This is because the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon HA2 is started, and the special figure 1 hold represented by the hold icon HA3 is the earliest special figure 1 hold among the currently held special figure 1 hold. This is to adapt the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 to the situation according to the change of the special figure variable display to be started next.

Further, since the hold icon HA2 displayed in the fluctuation display area 50e represents the special figure 1 fluctuation display being executed, it becomes the icon HA2 when it is displayed in the fluctuation display area 50e. That is, as a word that precedes the "icon", the icon displayed in the hold display area 50d is referred to as "hold", and the icon displayed in the variable display area 50e is referred to as "corresponding". In other words, when the hold icon is displayed and the start condition for the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied for the special symbol hold indicated by the hold icon, the variable display of the special symbol related to the establishment of the start condition is displayed. The corresponding hold icon is displayed as the icon.

When the icon is changed from the hold icon to the icon, in other words, when the icon is moved from the hold display area 50d to the variable display area 50e, the size of the icon may remain the same or may be enlarged. In FIG. 30C, the icon is magnified about twice when moving from the hold display area 50d to the variable display area 50e.

Then, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11 from this situation and the special figure 1 hold occurs, as shown in FIG. 30 (E), a new hold occurs in response to the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold. The icon HA4 is displayed in the second region 50d2 (not shown) described above.

In this way, when the first starting port 11 is won and the special figure 1 related random number is acquired, one common icon is displayed. This icon is erased when the special figure 1 variable display based on the prize is completed, but while it is displayed, the state in which the special figure 1 variable display is placed (pending state and running state). It will exist with different names (hold icon and the icon) depending on the situation.

By the way, as described above, the start winning command includes the winning / failing information and the special figure fluctuation pattern information. Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can display the hold icon in a normal mode or a special mode based on the pass / fail information and the special figure fluctuation pattern information. Displaying this hold icon in a special manner is called "hold notice".

When the display mode of the hold icon is a special mode, that is, when the hold notice is given, the player can expect that the jackpot may be won by the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon. Next, a specific example of the hold notice will be described. As a specific example of the hold notice, it is assumed that the display mode of the hold icon HA4 shown in FIG. 30 (E) is a special mode.

As one type of hold notice, a special mode is set immediately after the hold icon is displayed. In other words, the hold notice is given when the special figure 1 hold occurs (when the first starting port 11 is won). There is a type. For example, as shown in FIG. 31 (A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 30 (D)), the game ball wins the first starting port 11 and the special figure 1 is held. When is generated, the hold icon HA4 in the normal mode is displayed in the second area 50d2 (not shown) described above in response to the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold, as in the case of FIG. 30 (E). In the drawing, the hold icon in the normal mode seems to be completely stationary, but in reality, basically, even if the hold icon is completely stationary, the display position does not move, but it is in place. It may be configured to shake lightly with.

Immediately after that, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), the display mode of the hold icon HA4 changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 31 (B)) (hold notice is given). In the example of FIG. 29, the hold icon HA4 is displayed in the normal mode for a moment immediately after the display, but it may be displayed in the special mode and the period displayed in the normal mode may be eliminated.

As another type of hold notice, there is a hold notice type in which the hold icon changes when the hold icon moves, in other words, the hold icon change notice is given when the hold icon is shifted. For example, as shown in FIG. 32 (A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 30 (D)), the game ball wins the first starting port 11 and the special figure 1 is held. When the above-mentioned second region 50d2 (not shown) is generated, as shown in FIG. 32 (B), the hold icon HA4 in the normal mode (white in FIG. 32 (B)) corresponds to the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold. Is displayed in.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (C), when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the icon HA2 representing the special figure variation display that is being executed until immediately before that is deleted. Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbol (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 hold represented by the hold icon HA3, it is displayed in the first area 50d1 as shown in FIG. 32 (D). The hold icon HA3 moves to the variable display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA4 displayed in the second area 50d2 moves to the first area 50d1 (not shown). Here, when the hold icon HA4 moves from the second area 50d2 to the first area 50d1, the display mode changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 32 (D)) (hold notice is given). ..

In addition, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of special modes related to the hold notice so that the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the type of the special mode. For example, it is assumed that the display mode of the hold icon is associated with the color of the hold icon, and white, green, red, and gold are set as the display mode of the hold icon. Here, white is the normal mode, and green, red, and gold are the special modes. Then, the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the display mode of the hold icon can be set to increase in the order of white <green <red <gold.

The look-ahead effect can be performed on both or one of the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold. Further, the look-ahead effect is not limited to the display mode of the hold icon HA, for example, an image other than the hold icon HA on the display unit 50a such as a background image, a sound output from the speaker 52, light emission by the frame lamp 53, and a movable board. It is possible to execute the operation by the device 55 by using an effect device other than the image display device 50. Furthermore, as the effect mode of the look-ahead effect, in addition to the effect mode that continues uninterrupted from the execution such as the hold icon change notice by the hold icon HA until the special figure variation display is started, the effect symbol is stopped. The effect mode may be such that the display is performed intermittently and continuously, such as each time the display is started or the variable display of the effect symbol is started.

5. Game control by the game control microcomputer 101 [Game control main processing]
Next, the game control by the game control microcomputer 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 42. The flowchart for controlling the game described below is an example. Then, the plurality of processes in the flowchart can be appropriately changed in the execution order or executed in parallel as long as the processing contents do not conflict with each other.

Further, counters, timers, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in game control by the game control microcomputer 101 described below are provided in the game RAM 104. Further, the initial value of the counter is "0", the initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", and the initial value of the status is "1".

When the pachinko game machine PY1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 101 provided on the game control board 100 reads out and executes the game control main processing program shown in FIG. 33 from the game ROM 103. As shown in the figure, in the game control main process, first, the power-on process (S001) is performed. In the power-on processing, access permission setting to the game RAM 104, setting of the game CPU 102, SIO (System Input / Output), PIO (Parallel Input / Output), CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit: interrupt time management) Circuit) is set.

Following the power-on processing, the interrupt is disabled (S002), and the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003), counter values of various random numbers related to the normal symbol-related determination information and the special symbol-related determination information are added by 1 and updated. When the counter value of each random number reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of the counter of each random number may be a value other than "0" or may be changed at random. Further, at least a part of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, the interrupt is permitted (S004). While the interrupt is enabled, the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) can be executed. The game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed based on, for example, an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the game CPU 102 at a cycle of 4 msec. That is, the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed in a cycle of 4 msec. Then, between the end of the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) and the start of the next game control side timer interrupt process (S005), the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) is performed. The process of updating the counter values of various random numbers is repeatedly executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the game CPU 102 in the interrupt disabled state, the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S004). ..

[Game control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be described. As shown in FIG. 34, in the game control side timer interrupt process (S005), the output process (S101) is first executed. In the output process (S101), in each process described below, commands and the like set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104 of the game control board 100 are output to the effect control board 120, the payout control board 170, and the like.

In the input process (S102) performed after the output process (S101), the game control microcomputer 101 takes in the detection signal from the lower plate full switch that detects the fullness of the surplus ball storage hole 35A, and plays the game as the lower plate full data. Stored in the output buffer of the RAM 104.

The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed next is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the game control main process of FIG. 33. That is, the update processing of the counter values of various random numbers related to the normal figure-related judgment information and the special figure-related judgment information includes the execution period of the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) and other periods (main side timer interrupt processing (main side timer interrupt processing). After the end of S005), it is performed both as a period until the next game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is started).

Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103), the game control microcomputer 101 performs the sensor detection process (S104), then the normal operation process (S105), and further performs the special operation process (S106). Do. The sensor detection process, normal operation process, and special operation process will be described later.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes other processing (S107) to end the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005). Other processes (S107) include power failure monitoring processing when the power is turned off, updating the timer provided in the gaming RAM 104, and the like. Further, as another process (S107), a payout control process for paying out the prize ball to the player is performed. In the payout control process, the prize ball counter for the first starting port 11, the prize ball counter for the second starting port 12, the prize ball counter for the large winning opening 14, and the prize ball counter for the general winning opening 10 are " It is checked whether or not it exceeds "0", and if it exceeds "0", a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 170. Then, when the prize ball signal is transmitted, the update process of subtracting "1" from the prize ball counter related to the signal is performed.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S002 to S004 of the game control main process until the next interrupt pulse is input to the game CPU 102, and when the interrupt pulse is input (after about 4 msec). ), The game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed again. The game control microcomputer 101 is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 in the previous game control side timer interrupt process (S005) in the output process (S101) of the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) that is executed again. Outputs commands etc.

[Sensor detection processing]
Next, the sensor detection process will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 36. In the sensor detection process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening 10, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the general winning opening sensor 10a (S201). If no game ball has won in the general winning opening 10 (NO in S201), the process proceeds to step S203, and if a game ball has won in the general winning opening 10 (YES in S201), a predetermined number of game balls have been entered. The general prize opening prize ball processing for paying out the prize ball is performed (S202). In the general winning opening prize ball processing, the number of prize balls (“3” in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning of the general winning opening 10 is added to the prize ball counter for the general winning opening 10.

In step S203, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 13, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 13a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 13 (NO in S203), the process proceeds to step S207. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the gate 13 (YES in S203), whether or not the normal operation status = 1 described later, in other words, whether or not the normal drawing variable display or the auxiliary game is performed. Whether or not it is determined (S204). If the normal operation status is not 1 (NO in S204), the process proceeds to step S207, and if the normal operation status = 1 (YES in S204), the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter (label-TRND-F). Acquires the normal symbol random number indicated by (S205) as the normal symbol-related determination information, stores the acquired normal symbol-related determination information in the general-purpose map reservation storage unit 86 provided in the game RAM 104 (S206), and steps S207. Proceed to.

In step S207, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 12, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 12a. If the game ball has not won a prize in the second starting port 12 (NO in S207), the process proceeds to step S214, and if the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 12 (YES in S207), the game ball is designated. The second starting opening prize ball processing for paying out the number of prize balls is performed (S208). In the second starting port prize ball processing, the number of prize balls (“2” in the first embodiment) corresponding to the winning of the second starting port 12 is added to the prize ball counter for the second starting port 12.

Next, when the special figure 2 hold number (specifically, the numerical value of the special figure 2 hold number counter (special figure 2 hold number counter) provided in the gaming RAM 104) is "4" (upper limit storage number) or more. It is determined whether or not there is (S209). If the number of special figure 2 hold is "4" or more (YES in S209), the process proceeds to step S214, but if the number of special figure 2 hold is not "4" or more (less than "4"), the process proceeds to step S214. NO in S209), special figure 2 holding number addition processing is performed (S210). In the special figure 2 hold number addition process, the special figure 2 hold number counter is added by "1", and the special figure 2 hold number indicated by the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b is increased by "1".

Next, a special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), a jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), a reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and a special symbol variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-). The special figure 2 related determination information composed of HP) is acquired and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the game RAM 104 (S211).

Next, the second look-ahead determination process is performed (S212). In the second look-ahead determination process, the second start-up winning command is specified and specified by collating the current gaming state with the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the second look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. The second start winning command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b (S213).

Subsequently, in step S214, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first start port 11, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first start port sensor 11a. If the game ball has not won a prize in the first starting port 11 (NO in S214), the process proceeds to step S221, and if the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 11 (YES in S214), the game ball is designated. The first starting opening prize ball processing for paying out the number of prize balls is performed (S215). In the first starting port prize ball processing, the number of prize balls (“4” in the first embodiment) corresponding to the winning of the first starting port 11 is added to the prize ball counter for the first starting port 11.

Next, the special figure 1 hold number (specifically, the numerical value of the counter (special figure 1 hold number counter) for counting the number of special figure 1 hold provided in the gaming RAM 104) is "4" (upper limit storage number) or more. It is determined whether or not it is (S216). If the number of special figure 1 hold is "4" or more (YES in S216), the process proceeds to step S221, but if the number of special figure 1 hold is not (less than) "4" or more (NO in S216). ), The special figure 1 hold number addition process is performed (S217). In the special figure 1 hold number addition process, the special figure 1 hold number counter is added by "1", and the special figure 1 hold number indicated by the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a is increased by "1".

Next, a special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), a jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), a reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and a special symbol variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-). The special figure 1 related determination information composed of HP) is acquired and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the game RAM 104 (S218).

Next, the first look-ahead determination process is performed (S219). In the first look-ahead determination process, the first start winning command is specified and specified by collating the current gaming state with the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in the first look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. The first start winning command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in the storage area of the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a according to the current number of special figure 1 hold (S220).

In step S221, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening 14, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the large winning opening sensor 14a. If the game ball has not won in the large winning opening 14 (NO in S221), the sensor detection process is terminated, and if the game ball has won in the large winning opening 14 (YES in S221), the game RAM 104 has been reached. It is determined whether or not the counter value of the provided large winning opening winning counter is "9" or more (S222). The big winning opening winning counter is a counter for counting the number of winnings in the big winning opening 14 in one round game of the big hit game. In addition, the big winning opening winning counter is cleared every time each round game is completed. In the first embodiment, the number of prizes specified is set to "10". Therefore, the process of step S222 is performed.

When the counter value of the large prize opening winning counter is "11" or more (YES in S222), the sensor detection process is terminated and the counter value of the large winning opening winning counter is not "11" or more, that is, less than "11". If (NO in S222), the counter value of the large prize opening prize counter is added by "1" (S223), and the large winning opening prize ball processing for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls to the player is performed (S224). ), End the sensor detection process. In the large prize opening prize ball processing, the number of prize balls (“9” in the first embodiment) corresponding to the winning of the large winning opening 14 is added to the prize ball counter for the large winning opening 14.

As a sensor capable of detecting the game ball, a sensor other than the sensors 10a to 14a is provided, and based on the sensor detecting the game ball, processing other than the processing shown in FIGS. 35 to 36 is performed. Is also good.

[Normal operation processing]
Next, the normal operation processing related to the control of the normal figure display 82 and the electric chew 12D will be described. As shown in FIG. 37, the processing related to the normal figure display 82 and the electric chew 12D is divided into four statuses (stages). Then, "normal operation status = 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first confirms the "normal operation status" in the normal operation process (S105) (S1101). When the "normal operation status" is "1", the normal symbol standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "2", the normal symbol variation process (S1103) is performed. When the "normal operation status" is "3", the normal symbol determination process (S1104) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "4", the auxiliary game control process (S1105) is performed. The "normal operation status" is set to "1" by default.

The normal symbol standby process (S1102) is a process performed during standby when the variable display of the normal figure and the auxiliary game are not performed. In the normal symbol standby process (S1102), the hit determination is performed based on the normal symbol random numbers stored in the normal symbol hold storage unit 86. Further, the normal map fluctuation pattern is determined based on the current gaming state to determine the normal map fluctuation pattern, and the normal map fluctuation display of the normal map fluctuation time according to the determined normal map fluctuation pattern is displayed on the normal map display 82. And change the normal operation status to "2". Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the normal map fluctuation start command according to the normal map fluctuation pattern determination result in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the normal map variation display.

The normal symbol variation process (S1103) is a process performed when the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the normal symbol variation processing (S1103), it is determined whether or not the normal map fluctuation time has elapsed since the execution of the normal map variation display started (whether or not the normal map variation display is terminated), and the normal symbol is determined. If it is determined that the figure fluctuation time has elapsed, the stop display of the normal figure is performed based on the hit determination result, and the normal operation status is changed to "3". Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the normal map fluctuation stop command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the normal map fluctuation display.

The normal symbol determination process (S1104) is a process performed when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. In the normal symbol confirmation process (S1104), whether or not a predetermined stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the running normal figure started (whether to end the stop display of the normal figure). Whether or not) is determined, and if it is determined that the predetermined stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the normal figure displayed as stopped is a winning symbol. If it is not a hit symbol (if the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is a lost symbol), the normal operation status is changed to "1". On the other hand, if the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal operation status is changed to "4", and the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the auxiliary game start command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the auxiliary game.

The auxiliary game control process (S1105) is a process performed when the auxiliary game is being performed. In the auxiliary game control process (S1105), the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Then, when the auxiliary game is completed, the normal operation status is changed to "1".

[Special operation processing]
Next, the special operation processing related to the control of the special figure display 81, the special figure hold display 83, and the grand prize device 14D will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, the processing related to the special figure display 81, the special figure hold display 83, and the grand prize device 14D is divided into five statuses (stages). Then, "special operation status = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first confirms the "special operation status" (S1501).

The game control microcomputer 101 performs a special symbol standby process (S1502) when the "special operation status" is "1", and changes the special symbol when the "special operation status" is "2". The process (S1503) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "3", the special symbol determination process (S1504) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "4", the jackpot game control The process (S1505) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "5", the game state setting process (S1506) is performed. The "special operation status" is set to "1" by default.

The special symbol standby process (S1502) is a process performed during standby in which the variable display of the special symbol and the jackpot game are not performed. The special symbol standby process will be described in detail later.

The special symbol variation process (S1503) is a process performed when the special symbol is variablely displayed. The special symbol variation processing will be described in detail later.

The special symbol determination process (S1504) is a process performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The special symbol determination process will be described in detail later.

The jackpot game control process (S1505) is a process performed in the jackpot game. The game control microcomputer 101 performs the jackpot game control process to perform the jackpot game according to the jackpot game control table. When the jackpot game ends, the special action status is changed to "5". When each round game is started, a round number designation command indicating the number of rounds is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. Further, when all the round games are completed and the ending is started, an ending command indicating the ending corresponding to the jackpot symbol related to the jackpot game is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. It should be noted that the state in which the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special operation status "4" and controls the big hit game is the "big hit game state", and the special operation status "4" is set as the "big hit". It is called "gaming state".

The game state setting process (S1506) is a process of setting a game state to be controlled after the big hit game when the big hit game ends. For example, when controlling in a high probability state after a big hit game, the high probability flag is turned ON in the high probability flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the high probability state. Further, at this time, when limiting the duration of the high probability state, the duration is also set. For example, when the end condition of the high-probability state is the number of times the special figure variable display is executed, the number of times (hereinafter referred to as "high-probability specified number of times") is set in the high-probability remaining number counter provided in the gaming RAM 104. .. Further, when controlling in the time saving state after the big hit game, the time saving flag is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the time saving state. Further, at this time, when limiting the duration of the time saving state, the duration is also set. For example, when the end condition of the time saving state is the number of times the special figure variable display is executed, the number of times (hereinafter, referred to as "time saving specified number of times") is set in the time saving remaining number counter provided in the game RAM 104.

Further, in the game state setting process, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a game state command indicating the game state after the big hit game in the output buffer of the game RAM 104.

[Special symbol standby processing]
Next, the special symbol standby process will be described with reference to FIG. 39. In the special symbol standby process (S1502), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 2 is "0" (S1601). When the number of special figures 2 held is "0" (YES in S1601), that is, when there is no memory of the special figure 2 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 12, the special figure 2 is a special figure. 1 It is determined whether or not the number of reservations is "0" (S1608). Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is also "0" (YES in S1608), that is, when there is no memory of the special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the first starting port 11. It is determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1618). Here, if the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S1618), the special symbol waiting process is completed, and if the customer waiting flag is not ON (NO in S1618), the customer waiting command is set in the output buffer (S1619). , The customer waiting flag is turned ON (S1620), and the special symbol waiting process is completed.

Further, when the special figure 2 hold number is "0" but the special figure 1 hold number is not "0" (YES in S1601 and NO in S1608), that is, there is no special figure 2 related determination information, but the first start When there is one or more stores of the special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the mouth 11, the special figure 1 determination process (S1609) and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1610) are performed.

In the special figure 1 determination process (S1609), the earliest stored special symbol random number stored in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a is read out and based on the jackpot determination table associated with the game state. Then, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss (big hit judgment).

Here, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol type random number is read out and the jackpot symbol type is determined based on the first jackpot symbol type determination table (big hit symbol type determination). Then, the jackpot symbol data representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the special symbol buffer provided in the game RAM 104, and the symbol designation command representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104.

If the result of the jackpot determination is "loss", the loss symbol data representing the loss is set in the special symbol buffer, and the symbol designation command indicating the loss is set in the output buffer.

Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1610) will be described with reference to FIG. 40. In the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the state is currently in a non-time saving state (S1651). If it is in the non-time saving state (YES in S1651), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state is selected (S1652), and then the process proceeds to step S1654. After selecting the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the state (S1653), the process proceeds to step S1654.

In step S1654, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the jackpot determination result is a “big hit”. If it is not a big hit (NO in S1654), the process proceeds to step S1655, and if it is a big hit (YES in S1654), the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 is used for the big hit symbol. After selecting the variation pattern determination table in Special Figure 1 (S1659), the process proceeds to step S1660.

In step S1655, the game control microcomputer 101 makes a reach determination. In the reach determination, the reach random number is read out, and the reach random number is collated with the reach determination table according to the current gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state) to determine whether or not there is reach.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the result of the reach determination in step S1655 is “with reach” (S1656). If there is reach (YES in S1656), the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for loss with reach is selected from the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 (S1658). Then, the process proceeds to step S1660, and if there is no reach (NO in S1656), the current number of reserved special figure 1 is confirmed, and in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653. After selecting the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the loss without reach according to the number of reserved special figures 1 (S1657), the process proceeds to step S1660.

In step S1660, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the special figure fluctuation pattern random number, collates the special figure fluctuation pattern random number with the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1657 to S1569, and then collates the special figure fluctuation pattern random number with the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table. Special Figure 1 Judging the fluctuation pattern Special Figure 1 Judging the fluctuation pattern. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special figure 1 fluctuation start command indicating the determined special figure 1 fluctuation pattern in the output buffer (S1661), and the special figure fluctuation according to the determined special figure 1 fluctuation pattern. The time is set in the special operation timer (S1662), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process is ended, and the process is returned to the special symbol standby process.

The special operation timer is updated by 4 ms in other processes in the game control side timer interrupt process. In addition, the set special figure 1 fluctuation start command includes information on the type of special symbol (that is, special figure 1) and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination performed in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1610). Information on the result (information on the special map fluctuation pattern including information on the presence or absence of reach and the special map fluctuation time) is included.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 1 display 81a to start the variation display of the special figure 1 based on the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determined in step S1610 (S1611). ..

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a to the side to be read from the current position, and the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a. The storage area corresponding to the first hold storage area (the storage area farthest from the read side) is cleared in the special figure 1 hold storage unit shift process (S1612). In this way, the special figure 1 hold is digested in the order in which it was held.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 is changed by subtracting "1" from the special figure 1 hold number counter (S1613) and decreasing the special figure 1 hold number indicated by the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a by "1" (S1613). S1614), the special operation status is changed to "2" (S1615).

The game control microcomputer 101 subsequently determines whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1616), and if it is ON (YES in S1616), turns off the customer waiting flag (S1617), and performs a special symbol standby process. If it is not ON (NO in S1616), the special symbol standby process is completed without executing step S1617.

Further, when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is not "0" in step S1601 (NO in S1601), that is, one or more of the special figure 2 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 12 is stored. If there is, the special figure 2 determination process (S1602) and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1603) are performed. The special figure 2 determination process (S1602) and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1603) are basically the same as the special figure 1 determination process (S1609) and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610). ..

The special figure 2 determination process (S1602) is basic except that the table used for the jackpot determination is the second jackpot determination table and the table used for the jackpot symbol type determination is the second jackpot symbol type determination table. Since the process is the same as that of the special figure 1 determination process (S1609), the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1603) is also basically a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1603) except that the table used in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination is the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table. Since the process is the same as S1610), the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 2 display 81b to start the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 based on the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern determined in step S1603 (S1604).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b to the side to be read from the current position, and the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b. The storage area corresponding to the fourth hold storage area (the storage area farthest from the read side) is cleared in the special figure 2 hold storage unit shift process (S1605). In this way, the special figure 2 hold is digested in the order in which it was held.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special figure 2 hold number counter (S1606), and reduces and changes the special figure 2 hold number indicated by the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b by "1" (S1607). ), The special operation status is changed to "2" (S1615), and the process proceeds to step S1616.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure 1 hold is performed only when the special figure 2 hold is "0" (YES in S1601). That is, the digestion of the special figure 2 hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the special figure 1 hold. In the first embodiment, the lottery based on the special figure 2 hold is easier to win the jackpot symbol that is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the special figure 1 hold. It should be noted that the digestion of the special figure 1 hold may be executed in preference to the digestion of the special figure 2 hold. Further, the digestion of the special figure 1 hold and the digestion of the special figure 2 hold may be performed in the order in which the hold occurs regardless of the type of the special figure.

[Special symbol variation processing]
Next, the special symbol variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. 41. In the special symbol variation processing, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the variation display of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol variation time set in the special operation timer in step S1603 or step S1610 has elapsed (special). It is determined whether or not the operation counter = 0) (S1701). When the variation display of the special symbol is not terminated (NO in S1701), when the variation processing of the special symbol is terminated and the variation display of the special symbol is terminated (YES in S1701), the variation display of the special symbol is displayed on the special symbol display 81. Is terminated, and the stop display of the special symbol according to the symbol data (big hit symbol data or lost special symbol data) set in the special symbol buffer in step S1602 or step S1609 is displayed (S1702).

Subsequently, a preset special figure confirmation time (for example, 0.8 seconds) is set in the special operation timer (S1703), and a special figure change stop command indicating that the change display of the special symbol ends is output as an output buffer. (S1704), the special operation status is changed to "3" (S1705), and the special symbol change processing is terminated.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 42. In the special symbol determination process (S1504), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the stop display of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol determination time set in the special operation timer in step S1703 has elapsed (special). It is determined whether or not the operation counter = 0) (S1751). When the stop display of the special symbol is not terminated (NO in S1751), when the stop display of the special symbol is terminated by ending the special symbol confirmation process (YES in S1751), the normal probability state (high probability flag is OFF) is currently present. It is determined whether or not it is (S1752).

If the game control microcomputer 101 is not currently in the normal probability state (NO in S1752), the process proceeds to step S1757, and if it is currently in the normal probability state (YES in S1752), the game control microcomputer 101 is in the time saving state (time saving flag is ON). Whether or not it is determined (S1753). If the game control microcomputer 101 is not in the time saving state (NO in S1753), the process proceeds to step S1757, and if it is currently in the time saving state (YES in S1753), the remaining variable display of the special symbol that can be executed in the time saving state. The value of the time saving remaining number counter for measuring the number of times (time saving remaining number) is subtracted by "1" (S1754), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving remaining number counter is "0" (S1755). If the value of the time saving remaining number counter (time saving remaining number) is not "0" (NO in S1755), the process proceeds to step S1757, and if the time saving remaining number counter value (time saving remaining number) is "0" (in S1755). YES), the state is changed from the time saving state to the non-time saving state (the time saving flag is turned off) (S1756), and the process proceeds to step S1757.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 confirms the current game state, sets a game state command indicating the game state in the output buffer (S1757), and whether or not the special symbol currently stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol. (S1758). If it is not a jackpot symbol (NO in S1758), the special operation status is changed to "1" (S1762), the special symbol confirmation process is completed, and if it is a jackpot symbol (YES in S1758), the game state is reset (S). The normal game state is set. Specifically, the high probability flag and the time saving flag are turned off, and the values of the high probability remaining number counter and the time saving remaining number counter are set to "0") (S1759).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game preparation process (S1760), changes the special operation status to "4" (S1761), and ends the special symbol determination process. In the jackpot game preparation process, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a jackpot game control table according to the type of the jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104. In addition, the jackpot opening flag indicating that the opening is in progress according to the jackpot symbol displayed as stopped is turned on in the predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and the predetermined opening time (the jackpot game starts) according to the type of the jackpot symbol. The time from the start of one round to the start of one round) is set in the special operation timer. Further, an opening command indicating the type of the jackpot symbol is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 according to the type of the jackpot symbol. The opening command according to the type of the jackpot symbol indicates that the jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) according to the type of the jackpot symbol that has been stopped and displayed is started.

6. Production control by the production control board 120 [Production control main processing]
Next, control of the effect by the effect control board 120 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 43 to 47. The flowchart for controlling the effect described below is an example. Then, the plurality of processes in the flowchart can be appropriately changed in the execution order or executed in parallel as long as the processing contents do not conflict with each other.

Further, the counter, timer, flag, buffer and the like appearing in the following description of the effect control by the effect control board 120 are provided in the effect RAM 124. When the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 121 provided on the effect control board 120 reads out the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 43 from the effect ROM 123 and executes it.

As shown in the figure, in the effect control main process, first, the power-on processing according to the power-on is performed (S4001). In the power-on processing, for example, the effect CPU 122 is set, and SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time) and the like are set.

Next, the interrupt is disabled (S4002) and the random number seed update process is executed (S4003). In the random number seed update process (S4003), the values of various effect determination random number counters for determining various effects are updated. The random numbers for determining the effect include various random numbers for determining the content of the effect, such as a random number for determining a stop symbol pattern, which will be described later, and a random number for determining a special figure variation effect pattern.

As an example, the method for updating the random number counter for determination for various effects can be the same as the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above. Instead of adding the random numbers one by one at the time of updating, it may be added by two. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above.

When the random number seed update process is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the effect RAM 124 of the effect control board 120 (for example, a special figure variation effect start command, a customer waiting start command, an opening effect start command, and a round effect start, which will be described later). A command, an ending effect start command, etc.) are transmitted to the image control board 140.

The image control board 140 that has received the command displays an image on the display unit 50a according to the received command (executes various effects by the image). Further, the effect control board 120 can output sound from the speaker 52 via the sound control circuit 161 (execute various effects by sound), and the sub drive board, together with various effects performed by the image control board 140. The frame lamp 53 is made to emit light via 162 (various effects are executed by the light emission), and the board movable body 55k is operated (various effects are executed by the operation). The various effects include a special figure variation effect, a jackpot game effect (big hit opening effect, a round effect, a big hit ending effect), a customer waiting effect, an operation effect, and a look-ahead effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 permits an interrupt (S4005). After that, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While the interrupt is enabled, the receive interrupt process (S4010), the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012) can be executed. The 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011) and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012) will be described later.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed every time a strobe signal, that is, various commands sent from the game control board 100 are input to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt process (S4010), the effect control microcomputer 121 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output process (S101) of the game control board 100 in the reception buffer of the effect RAM 124. This receive interrupt process is executed in preference to other interrupt processes (S4011, S4012).

[1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 1 ms timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. The 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed every time an interrupt pulse having a 1 msec cycle is input to the effect control board 120. The effect control microcomputer 121 first performs an input process (S4101) in the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011). In the input process, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates the first effect button switch data based on the detection signal from the first effect button sensor 40a. The effect control microcomputer 121 creates the second effect button switch data based on the detection signal from the second effect button sensor 41a.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs light emission data output processing (S4102). In the light emission data output process, the effect control microcomputer 121 emits light emission data created by the light emission data creation process (S4203) in the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later in order to make the frame lamp 53 emit light at a timing that matches the effect of the image. Is output to the subdrive board 162. That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs the movable device control process (S4103). In the movable device control process, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates or outputs drive data (data for driving the board movable body 55k) in order to drive the board movable body 55k at a predetermined timing. That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 drives the panel movable body 55k in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a timer update process (S4104). In the timer update process, various timers provided in the effect RAM 124, which will be described later, are updated in order to manage and control the time related to various predetermined effects. In this process, the timer provided in the effect RAM 124 is updated by 1 msec.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs the watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer (S4105), and finishes the 1 ms timer interrupt process.

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 45. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 10 msec is input to the effect control board 120. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first performs a receive command analysis process for analyzing a command or the like stored in the receive buffer in step S4010 (S4201). The received command analysis process will be described in detail in the first embodiment described later.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs voice control processing (S4202). In the voice control process, the creation of voice data (data for controlling the output of voice from the speaker 52) and the voice control circuit 161 are performed based on the effect content indicated by the special figure variation effect data set in the effect RAM 124. Is output.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a light emission data creation process (S4203). In the light emission data creation process, light emission data is created based on the effect content indicated by the special figure variation effect data or the like set in the effect RAM 124.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 47. In the reception command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first receives a start winning command (first start winning command or second starting winning command) from the game control board 100, in other words, receiving the starting winning command. It is determined whether or not the data is stored in the buffer (S4301). If the effect control microcomputer 121 has received the start winning command (YES in S4301), it proceeds to step S4302, while if it has not received the start winning command (NO in S4301), it proceeds to step S4303.

In step S4302, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a start winning process according to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. In the start winning process, the received start winning command is stored in the start winning command hold storage unit 125 in the effect RAM 124. Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the stored start winning command and determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect indicating the jackpot expectation. The look-ahead effect includes a hold notice that displays the hold icon in a special mode, a continuous notice effect that is performed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of the special symbol, and the like. When it is decided to execute these look-ahead effects, a look-ahead effect start command for executing the determined effect is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

When the pre-reading effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives a predetermined effect from the image ROM 142. The image is read out, and the display unit 50a of the image display device 50 performs a look-ahead effect using the image. Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls voice according to the pre-reading effect content indicated by the pre-reading effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140 while the pre-reading effect is performed by the image performed by the image control board 140. The sound is output from the speaker 52 via the circuit 161 (the look-ahead effect by the sound is executed), and the frame lamp 53 is emitted through the subdrive board 162 (the look-ahead effect by the light emission is executed). It is possible to operate 55k (execute a look-ahead effect by the operation).

In step S4303, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the symbol designation command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the symbol designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the symbol designation command (NO in S4303), the process proceeds to step S4305, while if the effect control microcomputer 121 has received the symbol designation command (YES in S4303), the effect control command is sent to the effect RAM 124. It is stored in the symbol designation command storage unit 126 in (S4304).

In step S4305, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special figure variation start command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the special figure variation start command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the special figure change start command has not been received (NO in S4305), the process proceeds to step S4307, while if the special figure change start command has been received (YES in S4305), the production content of the special figure change effect is determined. , The special figure variation effect start process (S4306) for starting the special figure variation effect is performed.

In the special figure variation effect start process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first stores the special figure variation start command in the special figure variation start command storage unit 127 in the effect RAM 124. Next, the effect symbol EZ1 to be stopped and displayed based on the content of the stop special symbol (type of jackpot symbol, lost special diagram) indicated by the symbol designation command already stored in step S4304 and the special symbol variation pattern indicated by the special symbol variation start command. -EZ3 and the stop symbol pattern determination table for determining the stop symbol for determining the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are selected. A plurality of stop symbol pattern determination tables are provided in association with the special figure and the special figure fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects one stop symbol pattern determination table associated with the stop special figure and the special figure variation pattern. In each stop symbol pattern determination table, a random number value for stop symbol pattern determination (stop symbol pattern determination) is set in a plurality of effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 so as to have a predetermined distribution rate (%). Value) is distributed. Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the stop symbol pattern determination random number counter as the stop symbol pattern determination random number, and performs the stop symbol pattern determination based on the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number.

In the stop symbol pattern determination, the effect control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random numbers with the selected stop symbol pattern table, and determines the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 to be stopped and displayed. Then, the data representing the determined effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are set in the predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. For example, if the special symbol variation pattern is a loss variation without reach, a combination of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so as to have a so-called “separate stitch”. Further, if the special symbol variation pattern is a loss variation with reach, the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are the same, and the middle effect symbol EZ2 is different from them. The combination of KZ3 is selected. Further, if the special symbol variation pattern is a jackpot variation, a combination of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so as to obtain so-called "doublet" according to the effect mode and the type of the jackpot symbol. ..

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates a special figure variation effect pattern in which the effect content of the special figure variation effect is associated with the effect mode in which the effect is staying and the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command. Select the special figure variation effect pattern determination table for determining the special figure variation effect pattern determination. A plurality of special figure variation effect pattern determination tables are provided in association with the effect mode and the special figure variation pattern. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects one special figure variation effect pattern determination table associated with the special figure variation pattern. In each special figure variation effect pattern determination table, a random number value for determining the special figure variation effect pattern (special figure variation effect pattern) is added to one or more special figure variation effect patterns so as to have a predetermined distribution rate (%). Judgment value) is sorted. Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the random number counter for determining the special figure variation effect pattern as a random number for determining the special figure variation effect pattern, and based on the acquired random number for determining the special figure variation effect pattern, the special figure The variation effect pattern is judged.

The effect control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired special figure variation effect pattern determination random number with the selected special figure variation effect pattern table in the special figure variation effect pattern determination, determines the special figure variation effect pattern, and determines the special figure variation effect pattern. The data representing the special figure variation effect pattern is set in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and the special figure variation effect start command indicating the special figure variation effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

When the special figure variation effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is predetermined from the image ROM 142. The effect image of the above is read out, and the special figure variation effect is performed by the image on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50.

In addition, the special figure variation effect start command includes information on the effect flow associated with the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command. In addition to the special figure variation effect by the image performed by the image display device 50, the special figure variation effect start command includes the special figure variation effect by the sound output from the speaker 52 and the special figure variation effect by the light emission performed by the frame lamp 53. The effect content of the figure variation effect and the effect content of the special figure variation effect by the operation performed by the movable board 55k are included.

Further, in the effect control microcomputer 121, the special figure variation effect content indicated by the special figure variation effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140 while the special figure variation effect by the image performed by the image control board 140 is being performed. In response to this, the sound is output from the speaker 52 via the voice control circuit 161 (the special figure variation effect by the voice is executed), and the frame lamp 53 is made to emit light via the sub drive board 162 (the special figure by the light emission). (Execute the variation effect), operate the board movable body 55k (execute the special figure variation effect by the operation).

In step S4307, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the special figure fluctuation stop command (NO in S4307), the process proceeds to step S4309, while if it has received the special figure fluctuation stop command (YES in S4307), the special figure change. The special figure variation effect end process (S4308) for ending the effect (stops the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 and performs the stop display) is performed.

The effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the special figure variation stop command in the special figure variation effect end process, and appropriately ends the special figure variation effect based on the analysis result (effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and small symbol KZ1). A special figure variation effect end command for stopping the variation display of KZ3 is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. Upon receiving the special symbol variation effect end command, the image control board 140 ends the executing special symbol variation effect (stops the changing effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3).

In step S4309, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the game state command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the game state command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the game state command (NO in S4309), the process proceeds to step S4311, while if it has received the game state command (YES in S4309), the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the game state command. , The game state represented by the game state command is specified, and the game state setting process for setting the game state is performed (S4310).

In the game state setting process, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets a game state flag corresponding to the game state indicated by the game state command in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124. For example, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag “00H” in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 if the game state indicated by the game state command is the normal game state. Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag "01H" in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 if the game state indicated by the game state command is a high-probability high-base game state. Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag “02H” in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 if the game state indicated by the game state command is a low-probability high-base game state.

In step S4311, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the customer waiting command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the customer waiting command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the customer waiting command (NO in S4311), the process proceeds to step S4313, while if the effect waiting command has been received (YES in S4311), the effect waiting effect waiting process is performed. (S4312), the received command analysis process is completed.

In the customer waiting effect waiting process, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the waiting time (customer waiting effect waiting time:, for example, 20 seconds) from the stop display of the effect symbol to the start of the customer waiting effect. Set in the timer. The effect control microcomputer 121 can determine whether or not the waiting time has elapsed, and when it is determined that the waiting time has elapsed, the effect waiting effect start command for starting the customer waiting effect is issued to the effect RAM 124. Set in the output buffer of.

In step S4313, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the opening command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the opening command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the opening command (NO in S4313), the process proceeds to step S4315, while if it has received the opening command (YES in S4313), the jackpot game accompanies the start of the jackpot game. The opening effect start process is performed (S4314).

The effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the opening command in the jackpot opening effect start process, and determines whether or not to execute the jackpot opening effect according to the opening of the jackpot game to be executed from now on based on the analysis result. If you want to execute it, select the effect content of the jackpot opening effect (big hit opening effect pattern), and output the jackpot opening effect start command to start the jackpot opening effect with the selected jackpot opening effect pattern of the effect RAM 124. Set in the buffer.

In step S4315, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the game control board 100 has received the round number designation command, in other words, whether or not the round number designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the number of rounds designation command has not been received (NO in S4315), the process proceeds to step S4317, while if the number of rounds designation command has been received (YES in S4315), the round effect start process accompanying the start of the round game is performed. (S4316).

In the round effect start processing, the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the round number designation command, determines whether or not to execute the round effect according to the round game to be started, and if it is executed, the round effect. The effect content (round effect pattern) of is selected, and the round effect start command corresponding to the selected round effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

In step S4317, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the ending command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the ending command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the ending command has not been received (NO in S4317), the received command analysis process is completed, while if the ending command has been received (YES in S4317), the jackpot ending effect start process associated with the start of the ending of the jackpot game (NO). After performing S4318) and the effect mode setting process (S4319), the received command analysis process is completed.

If the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the ending command in the jackpot ending effect start process, determines whether or not to execute the jackpot ending effect according to the ending of the jackpot game to be executed, and executes it. The effect content of the jackpot ending effect (big hit ending effect pattern) is selected, and the jackpot ending effect start command corresponding to the selected jackpot ending effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the effect mode after the jackpot game based on the analysis result of the ending command, specifically, the jackpot symbol indicated by the ending command in the effect mode setting process (effect mode). Process to control).

For example, when the jackpot symbol indicated by the jackpot ending command is the jackpot symbols A or B or the jackpot symbols D and E, the effect control microcomputer 121 is set to the probability variation effect mode suggesting a high-probability and high-base gaming state. Then, the effect mode flag indicating the probability change effect mode is turned on in the predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and the probability change effect mode start command indicating that the probability change effect mode is set is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. When the probability variation effect mode start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is at the timing when the ending ends. , The probability variation background image G120 is displayed as the background image, and the probability variation BGM is output as the BGM.

Further, when the jackpot symbol indicated by the jackpot ending command is the jackpot symbol C or the jackpot symbol F, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets a time-saving effect mode that suggests a low-probability and high-base game state. Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns on the effect mode flag indicating the time saving effect mode in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and issues a time saving effect mode start command indicating that the time saving effect mode is set to the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. Set to. When the time saving effect mode start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is at the timing when the ending ends. , The time-saving background image G130 is displayed as the background image, and the time-saving BGM is output as the BGM.

<First Embodiment>
Next, the first embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-mentioned basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the following, mainly, as the first embodiment, points different from the basic embodiment will be described. In addition, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiments, or similarly corresponding configurations.

First, the rough feature points of the first embodiment will be described from the viewpoint of playability. In the basic embodiment, either "big hit" or "miss" was determined in the jackpot determination, but in the first embodiment, "small hit" is determined in addition to "big hit" and "loss". It may be done. In other words, in the first embodiment, a "small hit" that has not been determined by the big hit determination in the basic embodiment is provided.

Although the details will be described later, when the result of the jackpot judgment in the jackpot judgment is determined to be "small hit", the special figure fluctuation pattern is determined in the same manner as when "big hit" and "loss" are determined. Therefore, the special figure variable display is performed based on the special figure fluctuation pattern. In the special figure variable display, finally, the stop display of the "small hit symbol" indicating that the "small hit" has been won is performed. That is, in the special figure variable display, a "small hit" is derived as a big hit determination result. Then, when the stop display of the small hit symbol is performed, the small hit game is executed.

In the small hit game, the big winning opening 14 is opened. That is, the small hit game is a game that involves opening the large winning opening 14. The gaming state in which the small hit game is performed is sometimes referred to as the "small hit game state". In the small hit game state, the large winning opening 14 having a larger number of prize balls than the first start port 11 and the second start port 12 is opened, so that the small hit game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. It can also be positioned as a game state. In addition, in the small hit game state, the execution of the variable display of the special figure is regulated, and in detail, it is prohibited. Then, when the small hit game state ends, a new variable display of special figures can be started. The details of the small hit game state will be described later.

Further, in the basic embodiment, a non-time saving state and a time saving state are provided as a gaming state related to the ease of opening (easiness of opening) of the second starting port 12, and the player is relatively comfortable with the game. The advantageous time saving state was set according to the winning of the jackpot and the end of the jackpot game state. That is, the end of the jackpot game state (big hit winning or stop display of the jackpot symbol) was set as an opportunity for the occurrence of the time saving state. However, in the first embodiment, as an opportunity to set the time saving state, in addition to the end of the big hit game state, the stop display of the small hit symbol or the stop display of the lost symbol is also provided.

In the first embodiment, since only one type of small hit symbol is provided, when the stop display of the small hit symbol is performed, the time saving state is always set according to the stop display. On the other hand, there are four types of lost symbols, a lost symbol A, a lost symbol B, a lost symbol C, and a lost symbol D, and the time is shortened according to the stop display of the lost symbol B or the stop display of the lost symbol C. The state is set.

In this way, since the time saving state is set according to the stop display of the small hit symbol, the stop display of the lost symbol B, and the stop display of the lost symbol C, the small hit symbol, the lost symbol B, and the lost symbol C are It can be positioned as a special symbol that can set the time saving state.

Further, in the first embodiment, the jackpot determination based on the winning of the first starting port 11, in other words, the jackpot determination related to the special figure 1 variable display may be determined as "small hit", and the second start The jackpot determination based on the winning of the mouth 12, in other words, the jackpot determination related to the variable display of the special figure 2 is not determined as "small hit". Further, the lost symbol capable of setting the time saving state is determined only when the jackpot determination based on the winning of the first starting port 11 determines "missing". Therefore, basically, in a situation where the player is hitting left with the aim of winning a prize in the first starting port 11 in a non-time saving state, the time saving state can be generated regardless of the jackpot game state.

Next, various tables used by the game control microcomputer 101 for game control, which are different from the basic embodiment, and tables which are not used in the basic embodiment will be described. The tables different from the basic embodiment are the jackpot determination table, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table, and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. Tables that have not been used in the basic embodiment include a lost symbol type determination table, a game state setting table related to the stop display of the small hit symbol, a small hit game control table, and a game state setting related to the stop display of the lost symbol. There is a table.

First, the jackpot judgment table will be described. In the first embodiment, the jackpot determination in the case of performing the special figure 1 variable display based on the winning of the first starting port 11 and the case of performing the special drawing 2 variable display based on the winning of the second starting port 12 A jackpot judgment table that is different from the jackpot judgment is used. In the following, the former will be referred to as a "special figure 1 jackpot determination table", and the latter will be referred to as a "special figure 2 jackpot determination table". In the following, the jackpot determination related to the special figure 1 variable display will be referred to as "special figure 1 jackpot determination". Further, the jackpot determination related to the special figure 2 variable display is referred to as "special figure 2 jackpot determination".

FIG. 48 (A) is a configuration example of the special figure 1 jackpot determination table, and FIG. 48 (B) is a configuration example of the special figure 2 jackpot determination table. Both the special figure 1 jackpot determination table and the special figure 2 jackpot determination table include a table used in a normal probability state and a table used in a high probability state, as in the case of the basic embodiment. That is, the special figure 1 jackpot determination table includes a special figure 1 jackpot determination table for a normal probability state and a special figure 1 jackpot determination table for a high probability state, and the special figure 2 jackpot determination table includes a normal probability state. There is a special figure 2 jackpot determination table for high probability state and a special figure 2 jackpot determination table for high probability state.

As shown in FIG. 48 (A), in each special figure 1 big hit judgment table, a judgment value (special symbol random number judgment value) of a special symbol random number is appropriately set for each of the big hit, the small hit, and the loss, which are the big hit judgment results. It is distributed to. Therefore, when a jackpot determination is made in each special figure 1 jackpot determination table, it is determined to be either a jackpot, a small hit, or a loss. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48 (B), in each special figure 2 jackpot determination table, special symbol random number determination values are appropriately distributed to each of the jackpot determination result, which is the jackpot determination result, and the loss. Therefore, when the jackpot determination is made in each special figure 2 jackpot determination table, it is determined to be either a jackpot or a loss, and is not determined as a small hit.

Next, the lost symbol type determination table will be described. As described above, in the first embodiment, a plurality of types of lost symbols are provided. In the following, the type of lost symbol will be referred to as "missing symbol type". The lost symbol type determination table is a table for determining the lost symbol type when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. Similar to the jackpot symbol type judgment table, the lost symbol type judgment table also includes the lost symbol type judgment table (special figure 1 lost symbol type judgment table) and the special figure 2 variable display used when performing the special figure 1 variable display. There is a lost symbol type determination table (special figure 2 lost symbol type determination table) used when performing the above. In the following, determining the lost symbol type using the lost symbol type determination table is referred to as "missing symbol type determination". Furthermore, determining the lost symbol type using the special figure 1 lost symbol type determination table is called "special diagram 1 lost symbol type determination", and determining the lost symbol type using the special figure 2 lost symbol type determination table. This is referred to as "special figure 2 loss symbol type determination".

Here, the loss symbol type determination will be described. Similar to the jackpot symbol type determination, the lost symbol type determination is also performed by collating the random number for the jackpot symbol type determination with the lost symbol type determination table. That is, a common random number is used in the jackpot symbol type determination and the lost symbol type determination. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the "random number for determining the jackpot symbol type" described in the basic embodiment is referred to as the "random number for determining the symbol type".

In the first embodiment, three types of lost symbols, a lost symbol A, a lost symbol B, and a lost symbol C, are provided as the lost symbol according to the special figure 1, and the lost symbol related to the special figure 2 is 1 of the lost symbol D. There are different types of lost patterns. Then, as shown in FIG. 48 (C), in each lost symbol type determination table, the symbol type random number is determined for each lost symbol type so as to be the selection rate for each lost symbol type shown in FIG. 48 (C). Values (random number judgment values by symbol type) are appropriately distributed.

Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table will be described. In the basic embodiment, each of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is associated with the gaming state related to the ease of opening the second starting port 12. In other words, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table includes a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for the non-time saving state and a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for the time saving state, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table. There was a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state and a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the time saving state. In the first embodiment, the basic configuration of the special figure variation pattern determination table is common, but the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the time saving state is further subdivided. Specifically, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the time saving state is associated with the trigger of the time saving state, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the time saving state after the jackpot game state (first time saving state). Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for the second time saving state (special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for the second time saving state) and special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for the time saving state after the small hit symbol stop display and the lost symbol B stop display Table) and a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the time saving state after the loss symbol C stop display (special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the third time saving state).

Here, each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state and the trigger of the gaming state will be described. FIG. 49 (A) is a configuration example of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state, and FIG. 49 (B) is a configuration example of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state. A) is a configuration example of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state, and FIG. 50 (B) is a configuration example of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the first time saving state, and FIG. 51 (A). ) Is a configuration example of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the second time saving state, and FIG. 51 (B) is a configuration example of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the third time saving state.

As shown in FIGS. 49 (A) and 49 (B), the jackpot determination result is contained in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the time saving state. In addition to the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table when the jackpot is a big hit and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table when the big hit judgment result is a loss, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment when the big hit judgment result is a small hit. A table is also included. This is because, as described above, in the first embodiment, the determination result of the special figure 1 big hit determination includes "small hit".

In addition, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table when the jackpot judgment result is lost includes the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table (special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for lost symbol A) in the case of the lost symbol A and the loss. Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for symbol B (special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for lost symbol B) and special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for lost symbol C (special figure 1 fluctuation pattern for lost symbol C) Judgment table) and. This is because, as described above, in the first embodiment, there are a plurality of types of lost symbols, and depending on the type of lost symbols, a time saving state that is advantageous to the player occurs after the stop display of the lost symbols. This is to ensure that the special figure fluctuation time is secured to some extent and that the special figure fluctuation effect that raises the player's expectation is surely executed. Therefore, the reach judgment result is not associated with the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for the lost symbol B and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for the lost symbol C, and the special figure 1 fluctuation is the same as in the case of the jackpot. As the pattern determination result, the special figure 1 variation pattern in which the special figure variation effect ends due to the normal variation is not included. On the other hand, the reach determination result is associated with the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the loss symbol A, and the same as the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table relating to the loss for the non-time saving state in the basic embodiment, Further, there are a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the lost symbol A when there is a reach, and a special diagram 1 variation pattern determination table for the lost symbol A when there is no reach.

Next, the game state setting table for newly setting (changing) the game state will be described. In the basic embodiment, when the game state is newly set (changed) according to the end of the jackpot game state, it is based on the game state setting table associated with the jackpot symbol type related to the jackpot game state. The game state has been newly set (changed). In the first embodiment, the same applies when the game state is newly set (changed) according to the end of the jackpot game state. Then, when the game state is newly set (changed) according to the stop display of the small hit symbol, or when the game state is newly set (changed) according to the stop display of the lost symbol, basically, The game state is newly set (changed) based on the game state setting table.

In the game state setting table when the game state is newly set (changed) according to the stop display of the small hit symbol, the small hit symbol stop display when the small hit symbol is stopped displayed in the non-time saving state. Game state setting table (non-time saving small hit symbol stop display game state setting table) and small hit symbol stop display game state setting table (time saving small) when the small hit symbol stop display is performed in the time saving state There is a game status setting table for displaying the hit symbol stop). That is, the game state is associated with the game state setting table related to the stop display of the small hit symbol.

FIG. 52 (A) is a configuration example of a game state setting table for non-time saving small hit symbol stop display, and FIG. 52 (B) is a configuration example of a game state setting table for time saving small hit symbol stop display. As shown in FIGS. 52 (A) and 52 (B), according to the game state setting table for non-time saving small hit symbol stop display, the time saving state is set according to the stop display of the small hit symbol, but the time saving small According to the game state setting table for the hit symbol stop display, the time saving state is not set according to the stop display of the small hit symbol.

In addition, in the game state setting table (game state setting table for loss symbol stop display) when the game state is newly set (changed) according to the stop display of the lost symbol, the stop display of the lost symbol is displayed in the non-time saving state. Game state setting table for loss symbol stop display when performed (non-time saving loss symbol stop display game state setting table) and game state for loss symbol stop display when stop display of lost symbol is performed in the time reduction state There is a setting table (a game state setting table for displaying a time-saving loss symbol stop). FIG. 52 (C) is a configuration example of a game state setting table for non-time saving loss symbol stop display, and FIG. 52 (D) is a configuration example of a game state setting table for time saving loss symbol stop display. That is, the game state is associated with the game state setting table related to the stop display of the lost symbol.

Further, in the game state setting table for the non-time saving loss symbol stop display, the game state setting table for the non-time reduction loss symbol stop display (the game state setting table for the non-time reduction loss symbol B stop display) when the loss symbol B is used, There is a game state setting table for non-time saving loss symbol stop display (game state setting table for non-time saving loss symbol C stop display) when it is a lost symbol C, and the game state setting table for non-time saving loss symbol stop display includes Time saving loss symbol stop display game state setting table (time saving loss symbol B stop display game state setting table) when it is a lost symbol B, and time saving loss symbol stop display game state setting table when it is a lost symbol C (time saving loss symbol B stop display game state setting table) There is a time saving loss symbol C stop display game state setting table). That is, in the game state setting table related to the stop display of the lost symbol, the game state and the lost symbol type are associated with each other.

As shown in FIGS. 52 (C) and 52 (D), according to the non-time saving loss symbol B stop display game state setting table and the non-time saving loss symbol C stop display game state setting table, the loss symbol B is stopped. The time saving state is set according to the display and the lost symbol C, but according to the time saving lost symbol B stop display game state setting table and the time saving lost symbol C stop display game state setting table, the lost symbol B stop display and the lost symbol B stop display and The time saving state is not set according to the stop display of the lost symbol C.

In this way, the jackpot determination result is associated with the game state setting table for newly setting (changing) the game state. Then, the game state setting table related to the small hit and the game state setting table related to the loss are associated with the game state when the special figure stop display is performed. Further, the symbol type is associated with the game state setting table related to the jackpot and the game state setting table related to the loss.

In addition, the end condition of the time-saving state when the time-saving state is set according to the stop display of the small hit symbol, and the end condition of the time-saving state when the time-saving state is set according to the stop display of the lost symbol B. Is set to "special figure variable display 150 times". That is, the time saving state ends when the special figure variable display is executed 150 times without winning the jackpot, and becomes a non-time saving gaming state. On the other hand, when the time saving state is set according to the stop display of the lost symbol C, the end condition of the time saving state is set to "special figure variable display 50 times". That is, the time saving state ends when the special figure variable display is executed 50 times without winning the jackpot, and becomes a non-time saving game state.

Next, the small hit game control table will be described. The small hit game control table is a table used to control the small hit game in which the small hit game is performed. The small hit game consists of an open game that involves opening and closing the large winning opening 14, an opening (also referred to as OP) from the start of the small hit game to the start of the first open game, and the final open game. Includes the ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the game to the end of the small hit game. Each open game begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous open game and ends with the start of the next open game or the start of the ending. In addition, the small hit game is composed of the period from the start of the opening to the end of the ending with the open game in between.

FIG. 53 shows a configuration example of the small hit game control table. The small hit game control table stores elements (small hit game components) that make up the small hit game. The small hit game components include the number of open games, the opening time (opening pattern) of the large winning opening related to each open game, the opening time (opening time), the ending time (ending time), and the like. There is. When there are a plurality of types of small hit games, it is possible to set a small hit game component for each type of small hit game.

According to the small hit game control table, the open game is performed once. Then, in the first embodiment, in the open game, the large winning opening 14 is opened for 1.8 seconds. Further, from the start of the small hit game to the start of the first open game, the opening in which the large winning opening 14 is maintained in the closed state is performed for 2.0 seconds. Further, from the end of the last open game to the end of the small hit game, the ending is performed in which the closed state of the large winning opening 14 is maintained for 0.5 seconds.

Next, processing that is performed by the game control microcomputer 101 and whose processing content is different from that of the basic embodiment, and processing that is not performed in the basic embodiment will be described. The processes different from the basic embodiments are the special operation process, the special figure 1 determination process of the special symbol standby process in the special operation process, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, the special figure 2 determination process, and the special figure 2 variation pattern. The determination process and the special symbol determination process in the special operation process. On the other hand, as processing that has not been performed in the basic embodiment, there are a small hit symbol display post-game state setting process, a small hit game control process, and a lost symbol display post-game state setting process in the special operation process.

First, the special operation processing will be described. The special operation process according to the first embodiment will be described. A flowchart of the special operation process is shown in FIG. 54. In the special operation process according to the first embodiment, the processes related to the special figure display 81, the special figure hold display 83, and the grand prize device 14D are divided into eight statuses (stages). Then, "special operation status = 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8" is assigned to each of these statuses.

The game control microcomputer 101 performs a special symbol standby process (S1502) when the "special operation status" is "1", and changes the special symbol when the "special operation status" is "2". The process (S1503) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "3", the special symbol determination process (S1504) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "4", the jackpot game control The process (S1505) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "5", the game state setting process (S1506) after the jackpot game is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "6", the game state setting process (S1506) is performed. After the small hit symbol is displayed, the game state setting process (S1507) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "7", the small hit game control process (S1508) is performed and the "special operation status" is "8". If is, the game state setting process (S1509) is performed after the lost symbol is displayed. The "special operation status" is set to "1" by default.

The "special symbol variation process", "big hit game control process", and "game state setting process after the jackpot game state" according to the first embodiment are the "special symbol variation process" and "big hit game" according to the basic embodiment. The processing content is the same as that of "control processing" and "game state setting processing". The process related to "special operation status = 5" is "game state setting process after big hit game", which is different from the name in the basic embodiment, but this is a new game state in the first embodiment. This is because the name was changed in response to the increase in the opportunity to set (change) to, and the processing contents in "special operation status = 5" are almost the same. In addition, "special figure 1 determination process", "special figure 1 variation pattern determination process", "special figure 2 determination process", and "special figure 2 variation pattern determination process" in the "special symbol standby process" according to the first embodiment. , And "special symbol determination process" are "special diagram 1 determination process", "special diagram 1 fluctuation pattern determination process", and "special diagram 2 determination process" in the "special symbol standby process" according to the basic embodiment. , And "Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Pattern Judgment Process" and "Special Symbol Confirmation Process". Details of these processes will be described later.

The game state setting process (S1507) after displaying the small hit symbol is a process of newly setting (changing) the game state when the stop display of the small hit symbol is completed and the small hit symbol is confirmed.

The small hit game control process (S1508) is a process performed in the small hit game. When the game control microcomputer 101 performs the small hit game control process, the small hit game is performed according to the small hit game control table. It should be noted that the state in which the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special operation status "7" and controls the small hit game is the "small hit game state", and the special operation status "7" is set. It is called "small hit game state".

After the lost symbol is displayed, the game state setting process (S1509) is performed when the stop display of the lost symbol B and the stop display of the lost symbol C are completed and the lost symbol B and the lost symbol C are confirmed in the non-time saving state. This is the process of setting the state.

Although the details will be described later, the "special operation status" is changed to "6" in the special symbol confirmation process when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, the "special operation status" is changed to "8" in the special symbol confirmation process when the lost symbol B is stopped and displayed and when the lost symbol C is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the game state setting process after the small hit symbol is displayed is completed, the "special operation status" is changed to "7", and when the game state setting process after the lost symbol is displayed is completed, the "special operation status" is changed. It is changed to "1". Further, when the small hit game control process is completed, the "special operation status" is changed to "1".

Next, the special figure 1 determination process and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process in the special symbol standby process will be described. First, the special figure 1 determination process will be described. FIG. 55 shows a flowchart of the special figure 1 determination process. As shown in FIG. 55, in the special figure 1 determination process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines in step S1621 whether or not the game state related to the jackpot probability is currently the normal probability state. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the game control microcomputer 101 is in the normal probability state, in step S1622, the special figure 1 jackpot determination table for the normal probability state is selected, while it is determined that the game control microcomputer 101 is not in the normal probability state, that is, is in the high probability state. Then, in step S1623, the special figure 1 jackpot determination table for the high probability state is selected.

When the special figure 1 big hit determination table is selected, the game control microcomputer 101 makes a special figure 1 big hit determination based on the selected special figure 1 big hit determination table in step S1624. In the special figure 1 big hit determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored special symbol random number stored in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a, and selects the special figure 1 big hit determination. Check against the table to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss.

In step S1625, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 jackpot determination is a jackpot. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the jackpot is a jackpot, the special figure 1 jackpot symbol type determination table is selected in step S1626, and the special figure 1 jackpot symbol type determination is performed in step S1627.

In the special figure 1 jackpot symbol type determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the earliest stored symbol type random numbers stored in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a, and reads out the special figure 1 jackpot symbol. It collates with the type determination table and determines which jackpot symbol type it is. When the special figure 1 jackpot symbol type determination is performed, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a symbol type flag indicating the jackpot symbol type, which is the determination result, in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and in step S1629, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the symbol type flag indicating the jackpot symbol type. A symbol designation command indicating the jackpot symbol type, which is the determination result, is set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104, the special diagram 1 determination process is completed, and the process is returned to the special symbol standby process.

If the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1625 that it is not a big hit, in step S1630, it determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 big hit determination is a small hit. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a small hit, in step S1631, a symbol type flag indicating the small hit symbol is set in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and in step S1632, a symbol designation command indicating the small hit symbol is set. Is set in the output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, the special figure 1 determination process is completed, and the process is returned to the special symbol standby process.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1630 that it is not a small hit, the special figure 1 lost symbol type determination table is selected in step S1633, and the special figure 1 lost symbol type determination is performed in step S1634.

In the special figure 1 lost symbol type determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the earliest stored symbol type random numbers stored in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a, and reads the special figure 1 lost symbol. It is collated with the type determination table to determine which lost symbol type is used. When the special figure 1 lost symbol type determination is performed, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a symbol type flag indicating the lost symbol type, which is the determination result, in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and in step S1636, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the symbol type flag indicating the lost symbol type. A symbol designation command indicating the lost symbol type, which is the determination result, is set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104, the special diagram 1 determination process is completed, and the process is returned to the special symbol standby process.

Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process will be described. FIG. 56 shows a flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process. As shown in FIG. 56, in the special figure 1 pattern determination process, in the special figure 1 pattern determination process, first, as step S1641, is the gaming state related to the ease of opening the second starting port 12 a non-time saving state? Judge whether or not. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is in the non-time saving state, in step S1642, it selects the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state, while determining that it is not in the non-time saving state, that is, it is in the time saving state. Then, in step S1643, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the time saving state is selected, and the process proceeds to step S1644.

Subsequently, in step S1644, the game control microcomputer 101 confirms the symbol type flag and the like, and determines whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot determination result is a jackpot. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 1 big hit determination result is a big hit, the game control microcomputer 101 is used for the big hit in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table selected in either step S1642 or step S1643 in step S1645. Special figure 1 Select the fluctuation pattern judgment table. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 1 big hit determination result is not a big hit, in step S1645, the symbol type flag and the like are confirmed, and whether or not the special figure 1 big hit determination result is a small hit. To judge. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 1 big hit determination result is a small hit, the small hit in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table selected in either step S1642 or step S1643 in step S1647. The special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the above is selected, and the process proceeds to step S1656.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 1 big hit determination result is not a small hit, the symbol type flag and the like are confirmed in step S1648, and the result of the special figure 1 lost symbol type determination is the lost symbol A. Judge whether or not. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the result of the special figure 1 lost symbol type determination is the lost symbol A, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a reach determination in step S1649. In the reach determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the earliest stored reach random number stored in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a, and uses the reach random number as the current game state (non-time saving). By collating with the reach judgment table according to the state / time saving state), it is judged whether there is reach or not.

In step S1650, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the result of the reach determination is “with reach”. If the result of the reach determination is reach, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the reach loss symbol A in the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1642 or step S1643 in step S1651. After selecting the variation pattern determination table of the special figure 1, the process proceeds to step S1656. If the result of the reach determination is not reachable, the current number of reserved special figures 1 is confirmed in step S1652, and step S1642 or step S1643. In the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table selected in any of the above, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the special figure 1 lost symbol A according to the number of reserved special figures 1 is selected, and then the process proceeds to step S1656.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1648 that the result of the special figure 1 lost symbol type determination is not the lost symbol A, the game control microcomputer 101 confirms the symbol type flag and the like in step S1653 to determine the special figure 1 lost symbol type. It is determined whether or not the result of is the lost symbol B. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the result of the special figure 1 lost symbol type determination is the lost symbol B, in step S1654, in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table selected in either step S1642 or step S1643. Then, after selecting the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the lost symbol B, the process proceeds to step S1656. If it is determined that the result of the special figure 1 lost symbol type determination is not the lost symbol B, the lost symbol C is determined in step S1655. After selecting the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for use, the process proceeds to step S1656.

When the game control microcomputer 101 selects the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table in steps S1645, S1647, S1651, S1652, S1654, and S1655, the special figure 1 is based on the selected special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table in step S1656. The fluctuation pattern is judged. In the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored special figure fluctuation pattern random number stored in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a, and reads out the special figure fluctuation pattern random number. The special figure 1 variation pattern is determined by collating the pattern random number with the selected special figure 1 variation pattern determination table.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special figure 1 fluctuation start command indicating the determined special figure 1 fluctuation pattern in the output buffer in step S1657, and sets the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determined in step S1658. The corresponding special symbol variation time is set in the special operation timer, the special diagram 1 variation pattern determination process is terminated, and the process is returned to the special symbol standby process.

Next, the special figure 2 determination process and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process in the special symbol standby process will be described. First, the special figure 2 determination process will be described. FIG. 57 shows a flowchart of the special figure 2 determination process. As shown in FIG. 57, in the special figure 2 determination process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines in step S1661 whether or not the game state related to the jackpot probability is currently the normal probability state. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is in the normal probability state, in step S1662, it selects the special figure 2 jackpot determination table for the normal probability state, but determines that it is not in the normal probability state, that is, it is in the high probability state. Then, in step S1663, the special figure 2 jackpot determination table for the high probability state is selected.

When the special figure 2 big hit determination table is selected, the game control microcomputer 101 makes a special figure 2 big hit determination based on the selected special figure 2 big hit determination table in step S1664. In the special figure 2 jackpot determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored special symbol random number stored in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b, and selects the special figure 2 jackpot determination. Check against the table to determine whether it is a big hit or a loss.

In step S1665, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 jackpot determination is a jackpot. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the jackpot is a jackpot, the special figure 2 jackpot symbol type determination table is selected in step S1666, and the special figure 2 jackpot symbol type determination is performed in step S1667.

In the special figure 2 jackpot symbol type determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the earliest stored symbol type random numbers stored in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b, and reads out the special figure 2 jackpot symbol. It collates with the type determination table and determines which jackpot symbol type it is. When the special figure 2 jackpot symbol type determination is performed, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a symbol type flag indicating the jackpot symbol type, which is the determination result, in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and in step S1669, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the symbol type flag indicating the jackpot symbol type. A symbol designation command indicating the jackpot symbol type, which is the determination result, is set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104, the special diagram 2 determination process is completed, and the process is returned to the special symbol standby process.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1665 that it is not a big hit, that is, it is lost, the special figure 2 lost symbol type determination table is selected in step S1670, and the special figure 2 lost symbol type determination is performed in step S1671. Do.

In the special figure 2 lost symbol type determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the earliest stored symbol type random numbers stored in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b, and reads the special figure 2 lost symbol. It is collated with the type determination table to determine which lost symbol type is used. When the special figure 2 lost symbol type determination is performed, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a symbol type flag indicating the lost symbol type, which is the determination result, in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and in step S1673, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the symbol type flag indicating the lost symbol type. A symbol designation command indicating the lost symbol type, which is the determination result, is set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104, the special diagram 2 determination process is completed, and the process is returned to the special symbol standby process. As described above, in the first embodiment, only one type of the lost symbol D is provided as the type of the lost symbol according to the special figure 2.

Next, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process will be described. FIG. 58 shows a flowchart of the variation pattern determination process in FIG. As shown in FIG. 58, in the special figure 2 pattern determination process, in the special figure 2 pattern determination process, first, as step S1681, is the gaming state related to the ease of opening the second starting port 12 a non-time saving state? Judge whether or not. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the non-time saving state is determined, in step S1682, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state is selected, and the process proceeds to step S1689.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1681 that it is not in the non-time saving state, that is, it is in the time saving state, in step S1683, the type of the time saving flag described later is confirmed, and the time saving state is the time saving after the big hit game. Determine if it is in a state. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the time saving state is the time saving state after the big hit game, in step S1684, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the first time saving state is selected, and the process proceeds to step S1689.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1683 that it is not the time saving state after the big hit game state, the game control microcomputer 101 confirms the type of the time saving flag in step S1685, and the time saving state is the time saving state after the small hit symbol stop display. It is determined whether or not it is. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the time saving state is the time saving state after the small hit symbol stop display, in step S1686, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the second time saving state is selected, and step S1689. Proceed to.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the time saving state is not the time saving state after the small hit symbol stop display, in step S1687, the time saving flag type is confirmed, and the time saving state is after the lost symbol B stop display. Determine whether or not the time is shortened. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the time saving state is the time saving state after the loss symbol B stop display, in step S1686, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the second time saving state is selected, and the step On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving state after the loss symbol B stop display is not obtained, the process proceeds to step S1689 by selecting the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time saving state in step S1688.

In step S1689, the game control microcomputer 101 confirms the symbol type flag and the like, and determines whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot determination result is a jackpot. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 2 big hit determination result is a big hit, in step S1690, in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1682, S1684, S1686, and S1688, Select the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 2 jackpot determination result is not a jackpot, that is, a loss, the reach determination is performed in step S1691. In the reach determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the earliest stored reach random number stored in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b, and uses the reach random number as the current game state (non-time saving). By collating with the reach judgment table according to the state / time saving state), it is judged whether there is reach or not.

In step S1692, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the result of the reach determination is “with reach”. If the result of the reach determination is reach, the game control microcomputer 101 loses with reach in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1682, S1684, S1686, and S1688 in step S1693. After selecting the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for use, the process proceeds to step S1695. If the result of the reach determination is not reachable, the current number of reserved special figures 2 is confirmed in step S1694, and steps S1682 and S1684 are confirmed. , S1686, S1688 selected in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for loss without reach according to the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is selected, and then the process proceeds to step S1695.

When the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is selected in steps S1690, S1693, and S1694, the game control microcomputer 101 determines the special figure 2 variation pattern based on the selected special figure 2 variation pattern determination table in step S1695. .. In the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored special figure fluctuation pattern random number stored in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b, and reads out the special figure fluctuation pattern random number. The special figure 2 variation pattern is determined by collating the pattern random number with the selected special figure 2 variation pattern determination table.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special figure 2 fluctuation start command indicating the determined special figure 2 fluctuation pattern in the output buffer in step S1696, and sets the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determined in step S1697. The corresponding special symbol variation time is set in the special operation timer, the special diagram 2 variation pattern determination process is ended, and the process is returned to the special symbol standby process.

Next, the special symbol determination process will be described. FIG. 59 shows a flowchart of the special symbol determination process. As shown in FIG. 59, in the special symbol determination process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines in step S1751 whether or not to end the stop display of the special symbol and determine the special symbol, that is, in step S1703. It is determined whether or not the special figure confirmation time set in the operation timer has elapsed. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special symbol confirmation time has not elapsed, the game control microcomputer 101 ends the special symbol confirmation process. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure determination time has elapsed, it determines in step S1752 whether or not it is currently in the normal probability state (high probability flag is OFF).

If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is not currently in the normal probability state, it proceeds to step S1757, and if it determines that it is currently in the normal probability state, in step S1753, whether or not it is in the time saving state (time saving flag is ON). Is determined. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the time reduction state is not present, the process proceeds to step S1757. , It is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction remaining number counter is "0". When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the value of the time saving remaining number counter (time saving remaining number) is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1757, and the time saving remaining number counter value (time saving remaining number) is "0". If it is determined, in step S1756, the state is changed from the time saving state to the non-time saving state (the time saving flag is turned off), and the process proceeds to step S1757.

In step S1757, the game control microcomputer 101 confirms the current game state, sets a game state command indicating the game state in the output buffer, and in step S1758, the special symbol currently stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol. It is determined whether or not it is. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a jackpot symbol, the game state is reset in step S1759 (a normal game state is set. Specifically, the high probability flag and the time reduction flag are turned off, and the time reduction remaining number of times is set. Set the value of the counter to "0").

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game preparation process in step S1760, changes the special operation status to "4" in step S1761, and ends the special symbol determination process. In the jackpot game preparation process, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a jackpot game control table according to the type of the jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104. In addition, the jackpot opening flag indicating that the opening is in progress according to the jackpot symbol displayed as stopped is turned on in the predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and the predetermined opening time (the jackpot game starts) according to the type of the jackpot symbol. The time from the start of one round to the start of one round) is set in the special operation timer. Further, an opening command indicating the type of the jackpot symbol is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 according to the type of the jackpot symbol. The opening command according to the type of the jackpot symbol indicates that the jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) according to the type of the jackpot symbol that has been stopped and displayed is started.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1758 that the special symbol currently stopped and displayed is not a jackpot symbol, in step S1762, whether or not the special symbol currently stopped and displayed is a small hit symbol. judge. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a small hit symbol, in step S1763, the special operation status is changed to "6", and the special symbol determination process is terminated.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1762 that the special symbol currently stopped and displayed is not a small hit symbol, the special symbol currently stopped and displayed is lost symbol B or lost symbol C in step S1764. Determine if it exists. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a lost symbol B or a lost symbol C, in step S1766, the special operation status is changed to "8" and the special symbol determination process is completed, while the lost symbol B or the lost symbol B or If it is determined that the symbol is not a lost symbol C, the special operation status is changed to "1" in step S1765, and the special symbol determination process is terminated.

Here, the game state setting process (S1507) after displaying the small hit symbol and the game state setting process (S1509) after displaying the lost symbol will be described. First, the game state setting process (S1507) after displaying the small hit symbol will be described. As described above, the game control microcomputer 101 performs the game state setting process after displaying the small hit symbol when the special operation status is “6”. Since the game control microcomputer 101 plays a game in a time-saving state after the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the game state setting process after the small hit symbol is displayed is in the time-saving state triggered by the stop display of the small hit symbol. The time saving flag (time saving flag after displaying the small hit symbol) is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the time saving state, and the game state indicating that the time saving state is triggered by the stop display of the small hit symbol. The command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. Further, since the end condition of the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display "150" times, "150" times is set as the time saving specified number and set in the time saving remaining number counter. Then, the game control microcomputer 101 changes the special operation status to "7", and ends the game state setting process after displaying the small hit symbol.

Next, the game state setting process (S1509) after the loss symbol is displayed will be described. As described above, the game control microcomputer 101 performs the game state setting process after displaying the lost symbol when the special operation status is “8”. The game control microcomputer 101 sets the time saving state based on the lost symbol type in the game state setting process after the lost symbol is displayed. Specifically, if the stop display of the lost symbol B is performed, the game control microcomputer 101 has a time saving flag (time reduction after the lost symbol B is displayed) indicating that the time saving state is triggered by the stop display of the lost symbol B. The flag) is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the time saving state, and a game state command indicating that the time saving state is triggered by the stop display of the lost symbol B is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. To do. Further, since the end condition of the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display "150" times, "150" times is set as the time saving specified number and set in the time saving remaining number counter. On the other hand, if the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed, the game control microcomputer 101 has a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is triggered by the stop display of the lost symbol C (time saving flag after the loss symbol C is displayed). Is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the time saving state, and a game state command indicating that the time saving state is triggered by the stop display of the lost symbol C is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. Further, since the end condition of the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display "50" times, "50" times is set as the time saving specified number and set in the time saving remaining number counter. Then, the game control microcomputer 101 changes the special operation status to "1", and ends the game state setting process after displaying the lost symbol.

When the game control microcomputer 101 sets the time saving state in the game state setting process (S1505) after the big hit game, the game control microcomputer 101 has a time saving flag (big hit game state) indicating that the time saving state is triggered by the end of the big hit game state. The time saving flag) is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the time saving state, and a game state command indicating that the time saving state is triggered by the end of the jackpot game state is sent to the output buffer of the game RAM 104. set. Further, when the expected number of time reductions as the end condition is set in the time reduction state, that is, when the time reduction state after the end of the jackpot gaming state related to the jackpot symbols C and F is set, the end condition of the time reduction state is special. Since the number of times the variable display is executed is "100", the time reduction remaining number counter is set with "100" times as the time reduction specified number.

In this way, in the game state setting process after the big hit game (S1505), the game state setting process after the small hit symbol display (S1507), and the game state setting process after the loss symbol display (S1509), as a time saving flag indicating the time saving state, Since the big hit game state after time reduction flag, the small hit symbol display after time reduction flag, the lost symbol B display after time reduction flag, and the lost symbol C display after time reduction flag are set, the game control microcomputer 101 is based on the time reduction flag. , The time saving state associated with the opportunity can be specified, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table related to the time saving state can be appropriately selected to perform the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination.

Next, the effect when the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the time saving state according to each trigger will be described. First, the production in the time-saving state triggered by the end of the jackpot game state will be described. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a state in which the display unit 50a mainly performs the effect in the time saving mode in the time saving state triggered by the end of the jackpot game state. FIG. 60 (A) shows a state in which the ending effect is executed when the jackpot game ends as an effect before the effect in the time saving mode is performed, and FIG. 60 (B) shows that the ending effect is completed. The figure showing the state immediately before the special figure variation effect is started in the time saving mode, FIGS. 60 (C) to 60 (E) show the state in which the special figure variation effect is performed by the effect mode B. It is a figure.

As described above, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the time saving effect mode when the jackpot game state ends, and sends a time saving effect mode start command indicating that the time saving effect mode is started to the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. set. The set time saving mode start command is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004).

Upon receiving the time saving mode start command, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 switches from the ending background image G202 to the time saving background image G130 as shown in FIGS. 60A to 60B. Further, the image CPU 141 will be controlled in the time saving state from now on, and in the time saving state, a game is basically performed in which the second starting port 12 is awarded a prize and the special figure 2 variable display is performed. The right-handed image (right-handed image) G30 is displayed. Further, the image CPU 141 displays an image (time saving remaining number image) G31 showing the time saving remaining number of times related to the time saving state in a predetermined area of the display unit 50a.

The specific display contents of the right-handed image G30 and the time-saving remaining number of times image G31 are not particularly limited within the range in which the function can be exhibited, but in the first embodiment, the right-handed image G30 is horizontal to the display unit 50a. It is composed of a strip-shaped base part extending in the entire direction and a figure representing a plurality of right-pointing arrows arranged horizontally on the base part. It is composed of. Time saving remaining number of times In the part of "○○" related to the image G31, a number indicating the actual time saving remaining number of times is displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), before the ending effect is finished and the special figure variation effect in the time-saving mode is started, the time-saving specified number of times related to the time-saving state after the jackpot game state is "100". Is displayed. Further, the image CPU 141 displays the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 related to the jackpot game in a stopped state before the ending effect is finished and the special figure variation effect in the time saving mode is started.

Then, when the first special figure variation display is started in the time saving effect mode, as shown in FIG. 60 (C), the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the time saving remaining number image G31 is shown. The number of remaining time reductions is reduced by "1". Then, when the first special figure variation display is completed, as shown in FIG. 60 (D), the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed. Subsequently, when the second special figure variation display is started in the time reduction effect mode, as shown in FIG. 60 (E), the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the time reduction remaining number image G31 is displayed. The number of remaining time reductions shown is further reduced by "1". After that, unless a big hit is won, the special figure variation effect based on the special figure variation pattern is appropriately executed in the time reduction effect mode, and each time the special figure variation display is started, the time reduction remaining number image G31 indicates the time reduction. The remaining number of times decreases by "1".

Next, the effects performed in the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the small hit symbol, the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the lost symbol B, and the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the lost symbol C will be described.

In the first embodiment, in the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the small hit symbol and the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the lost symbol B, the effect mode corresponding to the time saving state is different from the time saving effect mode. Set. Hereinafter, this production mode will be referred to as a “super chance mode”. Then, in the super chance mode, a background image dedicated to the super chance mode (background image G140 for the super chance mode) is displayed on the display unit 50a as in the case of the time saving effect mode, and the BGM for the super chance mode is displayed from the speaker 52. (BGM for super chance mode) is output. In the first embodiment, the background image G140 for the super chance mode is composed of a moving image introducing the scenery of the golf course.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 receives, for example, a game state command indicating a time saving state triggered by the stop display of the small hit symbol and a game state command indicating the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the lost symbol B, the step After newly setting the game state in the game state setting process of S4310, the effect mode flag (super chance mode flag) indicating the super chance mode is turned on in the predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and the super chance mode is started. The indicated super chance mode start command is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. The set super chance mode start command is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004).

When the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the super-chance mode start command, the display unit 50a switches from the background image displayed immediately before the command to the super-chance mode background image G140. Further, the image CPU 141 will be controlled in the time saving state from now on, and in the time saving state, a game is basically performed in which the second starting port 12 is awarded a prize and the special figure 2 variable display is performed. The right-handed image G30 is displayed. Further, the image CPU 141 displays the time-saving remaining number image G31 representing the time-saving remaining number of times related to the time-saving state in the predetermined area of the display unit 50a.

On the other hand, in the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the lost symbol C, unlike the time saving effect mode and the super chance mode, the effect mode is set according to the time saving state. Hereinafter, this effect mode will be referred to as a “short chance mode”. Then, in the short chance mode, a background image dedicated to the short chance mode (background image G150 for the short chance mode) is displayed on the display unit 50a as in the case of the time saving effect mode and the super chance mode, and the short chance mode is displayed from the speaker 52. The BGM for the mode (BGM for the short chance mode) is output. In the first embodiment, the background image G150 for the short chance mode is composed of a moving image showing a state in which a predetermined character is jogging.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 receives, for example, a game state command indicating a time saving state triggered by the stop display of the lost symbol C, the short chance mode is set after a new game state is set in the game state setting process in step S4310. The effect mode flag (short chance mode flag) indicating the above is turned on in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and the short chance mode start command indicating that the short chance mode is started is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. The set short chance mode start command is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004).

When the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the short chance mode start command, the display unit 50a switches the background image displayed immediately before the short chance mode start image to the short chance mode background image G150. Further, the image CPU 141 will be controlled in the time saving state from now on, and in the time saving state, a game is basically performed in which the second starting port 12 is awarded a prize and the special figure 2 variable display is performed. The right-handed image G30 is displayed. Further, the image CPU 141 displays the time-saving remaining number image G31 representing the time-saving remaining number of times related to the time-saving state in the predetermined area of the display unit 50a.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the first embodiment, the special figure variation effect related to the small hit, the special figure variation effect related to the loss of the lost symbol type B, and the special figure variation related to the loss of the lost symbol type C are omitted. In the production, after the reach is established, a dedicated production is executed for these special figure fluctuation productions. In the following, this dedicated production will be referred to as "challenge production".

In the challenge effect, the background image (background image for the challenge effect) G116 dedicated to the challenge effect is displayed as the background image on the display unit 50a. That is, when the reach is established, any of the normal background images (first normal background image G111, second normal background image G112, third normal background image G113) that has been displayed up to that point is displayed on the display unit 50a. ) To switch to the background image G116 for challenge production.

Next, specific examples of the super chance mode and the short chance mode will be described. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a state in which the display unit 50a mainly switches from the normal effect mode to the super chance mode and performs the effect in the super chance mode. On the other hand, FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a state in which the display unit 50a mainly switches from the normal effect mode to the short chance mode and performs the effect in the short chance mode.

First, the super chance mode will be described. FIG. 61 (A) shows a state in which a challenge effect is performed on the display unit 50a in the normal effect mode, and FIG. 61 (B) shows a small figure after the challenge effect is completed on the display unit 50a in the normal effect mode. FIG. 61 (C) shows a state in which the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is executed in a manner suggesting that the hit and loss symbols B are lost and that the super chance mode is set. , A diagram showing a state immediately before the normal effect mode ends and the special figure variation effect by the super chance mode starts. In FIGS. 61 (D) to 61 (F), the special figure variation effect by the super chance mode is performed. It is a figure which shows the state which is being broken.

As shown in FIG. 61 (A), when the challenge effect is being executed in the special figure variation effect and the special figure variation display relating to the small hit and the lost symbol B is completed, as shown in FIG. 61 (B). , Small hit, and lost symbol B is suggested, and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner suggesting that the super chance mode is set. In the first embodiment, the character "small hit and loss of the lost symbol B and suggesting that the super chance mode is set" related to the effects symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are represented by the characters "small hit and lost symbol B". Image containing "super chance" (left super chance mode suggestion image) G32a, image in which the middle production symbol EZ2 contains the character "mode" (medium super chance mode suggestion image) G32b, and image in which the right production symbol EZ3 contains the character "rush" ( Right super chance mode suggestion image) It is composed of G32c respectively.

In the following, the left super chance mode suggestion image G32a, the middle super chance mode suggestion image G32b, and the right super chance mode suggestion image G32c are collectively referred to as "super chance mode suggestion image G32". The display of the super-chance mode suggestion image G32 suggests that the super-chance mode is set.

As described above, immediately after the special symbol confirmation process is completed, the game state command indicating the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the small hit symbol, or the gaming state indicating the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the lost symbol B Since the command is transmitted to the effect control board 120, the super chance mode is set according to the elapse of the special symbol confirmation time after the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, and the super chance mode start command is set. Is transmitted to the image control board 140. Therefore, at this timing, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), the background image G116 for the challenge effect is switched to the background image G140 for the super chance mode. Further, from now on, the game will be controlled in the time saving state, and in the time saving state, a game is basically performed in which the second starting port 12 is awarded a prize and the special figure 2 variable display is performed. Is displayed. Further, in the predetermined area of the display unit 50a, the time saving remaining number image G31 related to the time saving state is displayed. In the first embodiment, the time saving specified number of times related to the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the small hit symbol and the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the lost symbol B is "150", so that there is a super chance. Immediately after the mode is set, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), when the time saving remaining number image G31 is displayed, the time saving remaining number image G31 suggests that the time saving remaining number of times is "150" times.

Subsequently, when the first special figure variation display is started in the super chance mode, as shown in FIG. 61 (D), the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the time saving remaining number image G31 is displayed. The number of remaining time reductions shown is reduced by "1". Then, when the first special figure variation display is completed, as shown in FIG. 61 (E), the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed. Subsequently, when the second special figure variation display is started in the super chance mode, as shown in FIG. 61 (F), the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the time saving remaining number image G31 is displayed. The number of remaining time reductions shown is further reduced by "1". After that, unless the jackpot is won, the special figure fluctuation effect based on the special figure fluctuation pattern is appropriately executed in the super chance mode, and each time the special figure fluctuation display is started, the time reduction remaining number of times The time reduction shown by the image G31 is shown. The remaining number of times decreases by "1".

Next, the short chance mode will be described. FIG. 62 (A) shows a state in which a challenge effect is performed on the display unit 50a in the normal effect mode, and FIG. 62 (B) shows a loss when the challenge effect is completed on the display unit 50a in the normal effect mode. FIG. 62 (C) shows a state in which the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is executed in a mode suggesting that the symbol C is lost and that the short chance mode is set. FIG. 62 (C) shows the normal effect mode. FIGS. 62 (D) to 62 (F), which show a state immediately before the end of the process and the start of the special figure variation effect in the short chance mode, show that the special figure variation effect in the short chance mode is performed. It is a figure which shows.

As shown in FIG. 62 (A), when the challenge effect is being executed in the special figure variation effect and the special figure variation display related to the lost symbol C is completed, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), the lost symbol is displayed. The stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed in a manner suggesting that C is lost and that the short chance mode is set. In the first embodiment, the left effect symbol EZ1 expresses the character "short chance" as "a mode suggesting that the loss symbol C is lost and the short chance mode is set" related to the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. Image including (left short chance mode suggestion image) G33a, image in which the middle effect symbol EZ2 contains the character "mode" (medium and short chance mode suggestion image) G33b, image in which the right effect symbol EZ3 contains the character "rush" (right short chance) Mode suggestion image) It is composed of G33c respectively.

In the following, the left short chance mode suggestion image G33a, the medium short chance mode suggestion image G33b, and the right short chance mode suggestion image G33c are collectively referred to as "short chance mode suggestion image G33". The display of the short chance mode suggestion image G33 suggests that the short chance mode is set.

As described above, immediately after the special symbol determination process is completed, a game state command indicating a time saving state triggered by the stop display of the lost symbol C is transmitted to the effect control board 120, so that the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped. The short chance mode is set according to the elapse of the special figure confirmation time after the display is performed, and the short chance mode start command is transmitted to the image control board 140. Therefore, at this timing, as shown in FIG. 62C, the background image G116 for the challenge effect is switched to the background image G150 for the short chance mode. Further, from now on, the game will be controlled in the time saving state, and in the time saving state, a game is basically performed in which the second starting port 12 is awarded a prize and the special figure 2 variable display is performed. Is displayed. Further, in the predetermined area of the display unit 50a, the time saving remaining number image G31 related to the time saving state is displayed. In the first embodiment, the time saving specified number of times related to the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the lost symbol C is "50" times, so that it is shown in FIG. 62 (C) immediately after the setting of the short chance mode. When the time-saving remaining number image G31 is displayed, the time-saving remaining number image G31 suggests that the time-saving remaining number of times is "50" times.

Subsequently, when the first special figure variation display is started in the short chance mode, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the time saving remaining number image G31 is displayed. The number of remaining time reductions shown is reduced by "1". Then, when the first special figure variation display is completed, as shown in FIG. 62 (E), the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed. Subsequently, when the second special figure variation display is started in the short chance mode, as shown in FIG. 62 (F), the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the time saving remaining number image G31 is displayed. The number of remaining time reductions shown is further reduced by "1". After that, unless a big hit is won, the special figure fluctuation effect based on the special figure fluctuation pattern is appropriately executed in the short chance mode, and each time the special figure fluctuation display is started, the time reduction remaining number image G31 shows the time reduction. The remaining number of times decreases by "1".

Next, a characteristic game flow of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a characteristic game flow of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment. When the game is being performed in the normal gaming state, in other words, when the production by the first normal production stage, the second normal production stage, and the third normal production stage is being executed in the normal production mode, When the stop display of the small hit symbol or the stop display of the lost symbol B is performed, the time reduction specified number of times is 150 times according to the stop display, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the second time reduction state is used. The time saving state is set and the game shifts to the low-probability high-base game state, and at the same time, shifts to the super-chance mode. On the other hand, when the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed, the time reduction specified number of times is 50 times according to the stop display, and the time reduction state in which the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the third time reduction state is used is set. It shifts to the low-probability high-base game state and also shifts to the short chance mode.

Further, when the game is being performed in the normal gaming state, in other words, when the production by the first normal production stage, the second normal production stage, and the third normal production stage is being executed in the normal production mode. When the stop display of the jackpot symbol C is performed, the game shifts to the jackpot game state and shifts to the jackpot effect mode according to the stop display. Then, according to the end of the jackpot game state based on the stop display of the jackpot symbol C, the time saving specified number of times is 100 times, and the time saving state in which the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the first time saving state is used is set and is low. At the same time as shifting to the high probability base game state, it shifts to the time saving effect mode. When the big hit symbols A and B are stopped, the game shifts to the jackpot game state and the jackpot effect mode is set according to the stop display. Then, according to the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the stop display of the jackpot symbols A and B, the time saving state in which the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the first time saving state is used is set and the game shifts to the high probability high base game state. At the same time, it shifts to the probability change production mode.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment, the time may be shortened without executing the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to give a positive surprise to the player and improve the interest of the game. In addition, if a lost symbol or a small hit symbol that is different from the jackpot symbol that generates the jackpot game is stopped and displayed, the time is shortened. Therefore, the player should have a sense of expectation for the stopped display of the lost symbol or the small hit symbol. And improve the game entertainment

In addition, if the lost symbols B and C are determined in the lost symbol type determination before the special symbol variation display is performed, that is, it is determined that the time-saving state can be achieved by determining whether or not the time-saving state can be achieved. If this is done, the lost symbols B and C will be stopped and displayed, so that an opportunity to be advantageous to the player will be provided in addition to the jackpot winning. Therefore, the game becomes deeper and the game fun is improved. Further, in addition to after the stop display of the lost symbols B and C and the stop display of the small hit symbol, the time may be shortened after the big hit game is executed. In this way, by providing a plurality of routes to the time saving state, the game is appropriately complicated and the game entertainment is improved.

In addition, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, when a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the time may be shortened. 2 The conditions for determining the fluctuation pattern are different, specifically, since the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table is different, the game flow related to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can be appropriately complicated, and the game interest is improved. .. Further, as special symbols different from the jackpot symbol that can be shortened in time, there are a lost symbol B, a lost symbol C, and a small hit symbol, and the stop display of the lost symbol B and the stop display of the small hit symbol are performed. The conditions for determining the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern are different between the case and the case where the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed. Specifically, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table is different. The game flow related to the pachinko game machine PY1 can be appropriately complicated, and the monotonousness and boredom of the time-saving state can be prevented, and the game enjoyment is improved.

(Example of modification of the first embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the special figure 1 lost symbol type that causes the time saving state is two types of lost symbols B and C, but may be three or more types. In this case, as in the first embodiment, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table used in the time saving state may be different depending on the type of lost symbol. Further, in the first embodiment, the special figure 2 lost symbol type is provided only for the lost symbol that does not generate the time saving state, but the lost symbol type that generates the time saving state is provided as in the special drawing 1 lost symbol type. You may. In this case, in the time saving state, the same special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table as any of the special figure 1 lost symbol types that generate the time saving state may be used, and the special figure 1 losing symbol type that generates the time saving state may be used. A different special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table may be used.

Further, in the first embodiment, the special figure 2 big hit determination table does not include the small hit, but the small hit may be included so that the small hit can be won even in the special figure 2 big hit determination. In this case, the time saving state may be set when the stop display of the small hit symbol ends. Further, in the time saving state in this case, the same special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table as after the stop display of the small hit symbol according to the special figure 1 may be used, or a different special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table may be used. ..

Further, in the first embodiment, the small hit symbol is not provided with a plurality of types like the lost symbol, but may be provided with a plurality of types such as the lost symbol. In this case, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table used in the time saving state may be different depending on the type of the small hit symbol. Further, in the first embodiment, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the time saving state always occurs after the stop display, but the time saving state may not occur in some cases. That is, the small hit symbol may have a type of the small hit symbol that generates the time saving state and a type of the small hit symbol that does not generate the time saving state. Alternatively, only a small hit symbol that does not cause a time saving state may be provided.

Further, in the first embodiment, either the stop display of the small hit symbol or the stop display of the lost symbol can be in the time saving state, but as a trigger other than the end of the big hit game state, only the stop display of one of the symbols is displayed. It may be provided. Furthermore, the time saving state may be generated by the fact that the small hit symbol is derived as the big hit judgment result by the big hit judgment and the small hit symbols B and C are derived as the small hit symbol type judgment result by the small hit type judgment. Instead, for example, a determination as to whether or not to generate a time saving state (time saving determination) may be performed before the jackpot determination. In this case, for example, a random number (time saving random number) such as a jackpot random number is provided separately, and the judgment value of the time saving random number is determined by generating the time saving state and not generating the time saving state as in the jackpot judgment. The time reduction determination may be performed by collating with the time reduction determination table appropriately distributed. Then, when it is determined by the time reduction determination that the time reduction state is generated, the time reduction state may be set after the stop display of the small hit symbol or the stop display of the lost symbol. Further, in this case, the small hit symbol and the lost symbol are determined depending on whether the judgment result that the time saving state is generated by the time saving judgment is derived and the judgment result that the time saving state is not generated by the time saving judgment is derived. You may make it different. Furthermore, when the determination result that the time reduction state is generated is derived by the time reduction determination, the type of the small hit symbol or the lost symbol is further determined from a plurality of types, and the jackpot according to the first embodiment is determined. As in the symbol type determination and the lost symbol type determination, the special symbol determination table and the time reduction specified number of times (end condition) used in the time saving state may be different depending on the type of the small hit symbol or the losing symbol.

Further, in the first embodiment, the same special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table is used for the time saving state after the stop display of the small hit symbol and the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol B, but they are different. Special figure 2 The fluctuation pattern determination table may be used. Further, the time saving state after the stop display of the small hit symbol and the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol B shift to the same effect mode, but may be shifted to different effect modes.

Further, in the first embodiment, the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol B and the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol C shift to different effect modes, but the mode shifts to the same effect mode. You may do so.

Further, in the first embodiment, the same number of time reduction specified times is set for the time reduction state after the stop display of the small hit symbol and the time reduction state after the stop display of the lost symbol B, but different times. The specified number of time reductions may be set. Further, in the first embodiment, different times are set for the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol B and the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol C, but the same number of times is set. The specified number of time reductions may be set. Further, the same number of time reduction specified times may be set in the time reduction state of all the triggers related to the low probability high base game state.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the above-mentioned basic embodiment of the present invention and the first embodiment. The second embodiment is common to the first embodiment in that the time saving state may be set triggered by the stop display of the small hit symbol and the stop display of the lost symbol. In the following, mainly, as the second embodiment, the basic embodiment and the points different from the first embodiment will be described. In addition, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiment and the first embodiment, or similarly corresponding configurations.

In the first embodiment, with the end of the big hit game, the stop display of the small hit symbol / lost symbol B, and the stop display of the lost symbol C as triggers, the game state related to the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is common. Two time saving states were set. However, in the second embodiment, the time saving state in which the opening ease of the second starting port 12 (the ease of opening the second starting port 12) is different is set according to the trigger of the time saving state. In the following, the time saving state set when the big hit game ends is referred to as the "first time saving state", and the time saving state set when the stop display of the small hit symbol / loss symbol B is triggered is referred to as the "second time saving state". The time-saving state set when the stop display of the lost symbol C is used as a trigger is referred to as a "third time-saving state".

As described in the basic embodiment, the second starting port 12 is opened as a configuration that affects the ease of opening the second starting port 12 (the ease of opening the second starting port 12) in relation to the time saving state. There is a winning probability (winning probability) of winning, a fluctuation time of the normal map, and an opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game. Then, the hit determination for determining whether or not to hit is performed using the hit determination table, and the normal map fluctuation pattern determination for determining the normal map fluctuation time is performed using the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table, and the second starting port is used. The auxiliary game opened by 12 is performed using the auxiliary game control table. Here, in the basic embodiment (first embodiment), the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is associated with each of the tables, and the table used in the non-time saving state and the time saving state are associated with each other. However, in the second embodiment, the table used in the non-time saving state and the table used in the non-time saving state are provided according to the plurality of types of the time saving state. It is divided into a table used in the state, a table used in the second time saving state, and a table used in the third time saving state.

FIG. 64 (A) shows a configuration example of the hit determination table according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 64 (B) shows a configuration example of the normal figure variation pattern determination table according to the second embodiment, FIG. 64 (C). Shows a configuration example of the auxiliary game control table according to the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 64 (A), when the hit determination table for the non-time saving state is used, it is determined as a hit with a probability of 6600/65536, and when the hit determination table for the first time saving state is used. Is determined to be a hit with a probability of 59936/65536, and when the hit determination table for the second time saving state is used, it is determined to be a hit with a probability of 50,000/65536, and the hit determination table for the third time saving state is determined. When used, it is determined to be a hit with a probability of 65000/65536. Therefore, it is easy to determine that the hit is a hit in the order of the third time saving state> the first time saving state> the second time saving state> the non-time saving state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), when the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state is used, the normal map fluctuation time is determined to be 30 seconds regardless of the type of the normal map to be stopped. When the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table for the first time saving state is used, the normal map fluctuation time is determined to be 5 seconds regardless of the type of the normal map to be stopped, and the normal map fluctuation pattern determination for the second time saving state is determined. When a table is used, the fluctuation time of the normal map is determined to be 7 seconds regardless of the type of the normal map to be stopped, and when the normal map fluctuation pattern judgment table for the third time saving state is used, the normal map is stopped. Regardless of the type of figure, the fluctuation time of the normal figure is determined to be 3 seconds. Therefore, the number of executions per unit time of the normal map variation display increases (execution frequency) in the order of the third time reduction state> the first time reduction state> the second time reduction state> the non-time reduction state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 64 (C), when the auxiliary game control table for the non-time saving state is used, the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game is 0.2 seconds, and the first time saving state. When the auxiliary game control table for the second time is used, the opening time of the second start port 12 in the auxiliary game is 5.0 seconds, and when the auxiliary game control table for the second time saving state is used, the auxiliary game The opening time of the second starting port 12 in the above is 4.0 seconds, and when the auxiliary game control table for the third time saving state is used, the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game is 5.6 seconds. Become. Therefore, the opening time of the second starting port 12 in one auxiliary game becomes longer in the order of the third time saving state> the first time saving state> the second time saving state> the non-time saving state.

In this way, the hit determination table, the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table, and the auxiliary game control table are different depending on the type of the time reduction state, and the winning probability is the third time reduction state> the first time reduction state> the second time reduction state. The order is higher, the fluctuation time of the normal figure is shorter in the order of 3rd time reduction state> 1st time reduction state> 2nd time reduction state, and the opening time of the 2nd start port 12 in the auxiliary game is 3rd time reduction state> 1st. It is longer in the order of time saving state> second time saving state. As described above, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 increases as the winning probability increases, and the ease of opening the second starting port 12 increases as the fluctuation time of the normal figure decreases, and the second in the auxiliary game As the opening time of the starting port 12 becomes longer, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 increases. Therefore, in view of this, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 increases in the order of the third time saving state> the first time saving state> the second time saving state, and it can be said that the time saving state is advantageous to the player.

Further, in the game control microcomputer 101, in order to select the hit determination table, the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table, and the auxiliary game control table associated with the type of the time reduction state, the first time reduction state, the second time reduction state, And it is necessary to identify the third time saving state. Here, in the first embodiment, the time saving flag after the big hit game state, the time saving flag after displaying the small hit symbol, the time saving flag after displaying the lost symbol B, and the time saving flag after displaying the lost symbol C are set, but after the big hit game state. The state in which the time saving flag is ON is specified as the "first time saving state", and the state in which the time saving flag after the small hit symbol is displayed and the time saving flag after the loss symbol B is displayed is specified as the "second time saving state". Then, the state in which the time saving flag is turned on after the loss symbol C is displayed is specified as the "third time saving state".

Therefore, when the hit determination is performed in the normal symbol standby process in step S1102, the game control microcomputer 101 selects the hit determination table for the first time reduction state if the time reduction flag after the big hit game state is ON, and small. If the time saving flag after displaying the hit symbol and the time saving flag after displaying the lost symbol B are turned on, the hit judgment table for the second time saving state is selected, and if the time saving flag after displaying the lost symbol C is turned on, the third time saving is turned on. Select the collision detection table for the status. Further, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines the normal figure fluctuation pattern in the normal symbol standby process in step S1102, if the time saving flag after the jackpot game state is ON, the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination for the first time saving state is performed. When the table is selected and the time saving flag after displaying the small hit symbol and the time saving flag after displaying the lost symbol B are turned on, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern judgment table for the second time saving state is selected, and the time saving flag after displaying the lost symbol C is selected. When is ON, the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table for the third time saving state is selected. Further, when the game control microcomputer 101 controls the auxiliary game (opens the second start port 12) in the auxiliary game control process in step S1105, the first is that the time saving flag after the jackpot game state is turned on. When the auxiliary game control table for the time saving state is selected and the time saving flag after displaying the small hit symbol and the time saving flag after displaying the lost symbol B are turned on, the auxiliary game control table for the second time saving state is selected and the lost symbol is selected. When the time saving flag is turned on after C is displayed, the auxiliary game control table for the third time saving state is selected.

Further, in the second embodiment, the first time saving state, the second time saving state, and the third time saving state are the time saving state after the big hit game state of the first embodiment, and the time saving after the small hit symbol is stopped and the lost symbol B is stopped. It corresponds to the state and the time saving state after the small hit symbol C is stopped. Then, the game state in which the normal probability state is set as the game state related to the jackpot winning probability and the first time saving state is set as the game state related to the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is set as the "first low probability". It is called "high base game state". Similarly, a gaming state in which a normal probability state is set and a second time saving state is set is referred to as a "second low probability high base gaming state", a normal probability state is set, and a third time saving state is set. The game state in which is set is referred to as a "third low-probability high-base game state".

Further, in the second embodiment, as for the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table, as in the first embodiment, in the first time reduction state, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the first time reduction state is used, and the second embodiment. In the 2 time reduction state, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the 2nd time reduction state is used, and in the 3rd time reduction state, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the 3rd time reduction state is used. Further, regarding the time saving specified number of times related to the time saving state, as in the first embodiment, the time saving specified number of times related to the first time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot symbols C and F is completed is set to 100 times, and the second time saving is set to 100 times. The specified number of time reductions related to the state is set to 150 times, and the specified number of time reductions related to the third time reduction state is set to 50 times. In addition, as for the effect mode related to the time saving state, as in the first embodiment, the effect mode related to the first time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot symbols C and F is completed is set to the time saving mode, and the second time saving state is set. The effect mode related to is set to the super chance mode, and the effect mode related to the third time saving state is set to the short chance mode.

Next, a characteristic game flow of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a characteristic game flow of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment. When the game is being performed in the normal gaming state, in other words, when the production by the first normal production stage, the second normal production stage, and the third normal production stage is being executed in the normal production mode, When the stop display of the small hit symbol or the stop display of the lost symbol B is performed, the time reduction specified number of times is 150 times according to the stop display, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the second time reduction state is used. The second time saving state is set, and the game shifts to the second low-probability high-base gaming state, and at the same time, shifts to the super-chance mode. On the other hand, when the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed, the time reduction specified number of times is 50 times according to the stop display, and the third time reduction state in which the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the third time reduction state is used is set. Then, the game shifts to the third low-probability high-base game state and shifts to the short chance mode.

Further, when the game is being performed in the normal gaming state, in other words, when the production by the first normal production stage, the second normal production stage, and the third normal production stage is being executed in the normal production mode. When the stop display of the jackpot symbol C is performed, the game shifts to the jackpot game state and shifts to the jackpot effect mode according to the stop display. Then, according to the end of the jackpot game state based on the stop display of the jackpot symbol C, the time saving specified number of times is 100 times, and the first time saving state in which the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the first time saving state is used is set. It shifts to the low-probability high-base game state and also shifts to the time-saving production mode. When the big hit symbols A and B are stopped, the game shifts to the jackpot game state and the jackpot effect mode is set according to the stop display. Then, according to the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the stop display of the jackpot symbols A and B, the time saving state in which the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the first time saving state is used is set and the game shifts to the high probability high base game state. At the same time, it shifts to the probability change production mode.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the second embodiment, when the lost symbol B, the lost symbol C, and the small hit symbol different from the jackpot symbol are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not executed and the time is shortened. Therefore, there are different types of time saving states depending on whether the lost symbol B is stopped or the small hit symbol is stopped or the lost symbol C is stopped, and in detail, the constituent elements (hits). Since the winning probability, the fluctuation time of the normal figure, and the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game are different, the game flow related to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is appropriately complicated, and the time saving state is monotonized. You can prevent getting bored and improve the fun of playing games. Further, in order to determine the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern in the time saving state in the case where the stop display of the lost symbol B and the stop display of the small hit symbol are performed and the case where the stop display of the lost symbol C is performed. Since the conditions are different, specifically, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table is different, it is possible to change the game related to the time saving state, and the game interest is improved.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the second embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed, the time is shortened and the special symbols (missing symbol B, losing symbol C, small hit symbol) different from the jackpot symbol are There are cases where the time is shortened when the stop display is displayed, and when the jackpot game is executed and when special symbols (missing symbol B, losing symbol C, small hit symbol) different from the jackpot symbol are stopped and displayed. And, different types of time saving states, in detail, the constituent elements (winning probability, normal figure fluctuation time, opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game) are different time saving states, so the pachinko game machine PY1 The game flow can be appropriately complicated, and the monotonousness and boredom of the time saving state can be prevented, which improves the game entertainment. Further, the time saving state (first time saving state) when the jackpot game is executed and the time saving state (missing symbol B, losing symbol C, small hit symbol) different from the jackpot symbol are stopped and displayed (the lost symbol). Since the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is different between the second time saving state and the third time saving state), the time saving state can be changed and the game entertainment is improved. Further, the conditions for determining the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern are different between the first time saving state, the second time saving state, and the third time saving state. Specifically, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table is different. Furthermore, it is possible to change the game related to the time saving state, and the game interest is improved.

(Example of modification of the second embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the second embodiment will be described. A gaming state (non-time saving state / first time saving state / second time saving state / third time saving state) related to the ease of opening the second starting port 12 (easiness of opening the second starting port 12) in the second embodiment. ) Is not particularly limited, and the specific values of the elements (winning probability / fluctuation time of the normal figure / opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game) are not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the second embodiment, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is set to be high in the order of the third time saving state> the first time saving state> the second time saving state, but this order is appropriately changed. Is also good. Further, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 may be set to be the same or substantially the same among some types or all types in the time saving state. In this case, even if the overall easiness of opening is the same or substantially the same, the elements constituting the time saving state (winning probability / fluctuation time of the normal figure / opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game) are different. By doing so, it is preferable that the details of the time saving state are different and the player's perception of the time saving state is different even if the overall ease of opening is the same or substantially the same. This is because the playability, especially the time saving state, is diversified, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the normal map fluctuation pattern determination is performed for each time saving state, the same normal map fluctuation time is determined regardless of the type (hit / loss) of the normal map that is stopped and displayed. , It may be decided that the fluctuation time of the normal map differs depending on the type of the normal map. Furthermore, like the special figure fluctuation pattern, it is possible to determine one of a plurality of types of normal map fluctuation times for either hit or loss, or for any one of the special figures. By acquiring a random number such as a fluctuation pattern random number, the fluctuation time of the normal map may be determined by determination. Further, in the second embodiment, the stop time of the normal symbol is constant regardless of the game state, but such as the winning probability, the normal figure fluctuation time, and the opening time of the second start port 12 in the auxiliary game. It may be different depending on the game state.

Further, in the second embodiment, the special figure 1 lost symbol type that causes the time saving state is two types of lost symbols B and C, but may be three or more types. In this case, as in the second embodiment, the type of the time saving state may be different depending on the type of lost symbol. Further, in the second embodiment, the special figure 2 lost symbol type is provided only for the lost symbol that does not generate the time saving state, but the lost symbol type that generates the time saving state is provided as in the special drawing 1 lost symbol type. You may. In this case, in the time saving state, the same special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table as any of the special figure 1 lost symbol types that generate the time saving state may be used, and the special figure 1 losing symbol type that generates the time saving state may be used. A different special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table may be used.

Further, in the second embodiment, the small hit symbol is not provided with a plurality of types as in the lost symbol, but a plurality of types may be provided as in the lost symbol. In this case, the type of the time saving state may be different depending on the type of the small hit symbol. Further, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table used may be different depending on the type of the time saving state.

Further, in the second embodiment, after the stop display of the small hit symbol and after the stop display of the lost symbol B, the second time saving state of the same type is set, but the time saving state of different types is set. Is also good. In this case, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table used may be different depending on the type of the time saving state. Further, the time saving state after the stop display of the small hit symbol and the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol B shift to the same effect mode, but may be shifted to different effect modes. Further, in the second embodiment, the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol B and the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol C shift to different effect modes, but the mode shifts to the same effect mode. You may do so.

In addition, the time saving state is not generated because the small hit symbol is derived as the big hit judgment result by the big hit judgment and the small hit symbols B and C are derived as the small hit symbol type judgment result by the small hit type judgment. For example, a determination as to whether or not to generate a time saving state (time saving determination) may be performed before the jackpot determination. In this case, for example, a random number (time saving random number) such as a jackpot random number is provided separately, and the judgment value of the time saving random number is determined by generating the time saving state and not generating the time saving state as in the jackpot judgment. The time reduction determination may be performed by collating with the time reduction determination table appropriately distributed. Then, when it is determined by the time reduction determination that the time reduction state is generated, the time reduction state may be set after the stop display of the small hit symbol or the stop display of the lost symbol. Further, in this case, the small hit symbol and the lost symbol are determined depending on whether the judgment result that the time saving state is generated by the time saving judgment is derived and the judgment result that the time saving state is not generated by the time saving judgment is derived. You may make it different. Further, when the judgment result that the time saving state is generated is derived by the time saving judgment, the type of the small hit symbol or the lost symbol is further determined from a plurality of the big hits according to the first embodiment. Depending on the type of the small hit symbol or the lost symbol, such as the symbol type judgment and the lost symbol type judgment, the type of the time saving state (elements constituting the time saving state (winning probability, normal symbol fluctuation pattern, first in auxiliary game) (2) Specific contents of the opening time of the starting port 12), the special figure determination table used in the time saving state, and the specified number of times of time saving (end condition) may be different.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the above-mentioned basic embodiment of the present invention and the first embodiment. The third embodiment is almost the same as the first embodiment, but in the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol C, the time saving state after the stop display of the small hit symbol and the time saving after the stop display of the lost symbol B are displayed. The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table used in the state is used, that is, the time saving state after the stop display of the small hit symbol, the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol B, and the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol C. It differs from the first embodiment in that the same special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table common to the above is used. In the following, mainly, as the third embodiment, the basic embodiment and the points different from the first embodiment will be described. In addition, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiment and the first embodiment, or similarly corresponding configurations.

FIG. 66 shows the variation of the special figure 2 used in the third embodiment in the time saving state after the stop display of the small hit symbol, the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol B, and the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol C. The pattern judgment table is shown. The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table is used in the first embodiment in the time saving state after the stop display of the small hit symbol and the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol B. (Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the second time saving state), but the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table common to these three time saving states is not limited to this, and the loss symbol C in the first embodiment is not limited to this. The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table (special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the third time reduction state) used in the time saving state after the stop display may be used. Furthermore, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table common to these three time reduction states is different from the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the second time reduction state and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the third time reduction state. It may be configured by a fluctuation pattern determination table.

It should be noted that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table used in the time saving state after the stop display of the small hit symbol, the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol B, and the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol C is the same. 2 The variation pattern determination process is changed as shown in FIG. 67. Specifically, if it is determined in step S1683 that the time saving state is not after the jackpot game state, the process proceeds to step S1686 as it is, and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the second time saving state is selected.

Further, in the third embodiment, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination used in the time saving state after the stop display of the small hit symbol, the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol B, and the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol C. Although the tables are the same, regarding the specified number of time reductions, as in the case of the first embodiment, the specified number of time reductions related to the time reduction state after the stop display of the small hit symbol and the time reduction state after the stop display of the lost symbol B Is 150 times, and the specified number of time reductions related to the time reduction state after the stop display of the lost symbol C is 50 times. However, the time saving specified number of times related to the time saving state after the stop display of the small hit symbol and the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol B and the time saving specified number of times related to the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol C are made the same. Is also good.

Further, as for the effect mode, as in the case of the first embodiment, the effect mode related to the time reduction state after the stop display of the small hit symbol and the time reduction state after the stop display of the lost symbol B is set as the super chance mode, and the effect is lost. The effect mode related to the time saving state after the stop display of the symbol C is set as the short chance mode. However, the effect mode related to the time saving state after the stop display of the small hit symbol and the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol B and the effect mode related to the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol C may be the same. ..

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the third embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed, the time is shortened and the special symbols (missing symbol B, losing symbol C, small hit) different from the jackpot symbol are used. When the symbol) is stopped and displayed, there are times when the time is shortened, and when the jackpot game is executed, special symbols (missing symbol B, losing symbol C, small hit symbol) different from the jackpot symbol are stopped and displayed. Since the conditions for determining the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern are different from those in the case of the above, specifically, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table is different, the game flow related to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is appropriately complicated. , It is possible to prevent monotonousness and boredom for the time saving state, and the game entertainment is improved. In addition, there are lost symbol B, lost symbol C, and small hit symbol as special symbols (missing symbol B, lost symbol C, small hit symbol) that are different from the jackpot symbol that causes a time saving state, and the stop display of the lost symbol B is provided. The conditions for determining the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern are the same, specifically, the later time saving state, the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol C, and the time saving state after the stop display of the small hit symbol. Since the variation pattern determination table of FIG. 2 is shared, it is possible to prevent the gaming flow of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 from being excessively complicated and deteriorating the game interest. Further, the end condition, specifically, the specified number of time reductions, is determined by the time reduction state after the stop display of the lost symbol B, the time reduction state after the stop display of the small hit symbol, and the time reduction state after the stop display of the loss symbol C. Since it is different, it is possible to change the time saving state and improve the game entertainment.

(Example of modification of the third embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the third embodiment will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state after the stop display of the small hit symbol, the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol B, and the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol C is the same, but is lost. The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state after the stop display of the symbol B and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol C are the same. The variation pattern determination table of FIG. 2 and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used in the time saving state after the stop display of the small hit symbol may be different. Further, the specified number of time reductions related to the time reduction state after the stop display of the lost symbol B and the specified number of time reductions related to the time reduction state after the stop display of the lost symbol C are the same. May be different from the specified number of time reductions related to the time reduction state after the stop display of. Further, the effect mode related to the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol B and the effect mode related to the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol C are the same, and this effect mode and the stop display of the small hit symbol are the same. It may be different from the effect mode related to the later time saving state.

In addition, the time saving state is not generated because the small hit symbol is derived as the big hit judgment result by the big hit judgment and the small hit symbols B and C are derived as the small hit symbol type judgment result by the small hit type judgment. For example, a determination as to whether or not to generate a time saving state (time saving determination) may be performed before the jackpot determination. In this case, for example, a random number (time saving random number) such as a jackpot random number is provided separately, and the judgment value of the time saving random number is determined by generating the time saving state and not generating the time saving state as in the jackpot judgment. The time reduction determination may be performed by collating with the time reduction determination table appropriately distributed. Then, when it is determined by the time reduction determination that the time reduction state is generated, the time reduction state may be set after the stop display of the small hit symbol or the stop display of the lost symbol. Further, in this case, the small hit symbol and the lost symbol are determined depending on whether the judgment result that the time saving state is generated by the time saving judgment is derived and the judgment result that the time saving state is not generated by the time saving judgment is derived. You may make it different. Further, when the judgment result that the time saving state is generated is derived by the time saving judgment, the type of the small hit symbol or the lost symbol is further determined from a plurality of the big hits according to the first embodiment. The specified number of time reductions (end condition) may be different depending on the type of the small hit symbol or the lost symbol, such as the symbol type determination or the lost symbol type determination.

<Fourth Embodiment>
A fourth embodiment will be described. The fourth embodiment is also common to the first embodiment and the like in that the time saving state may be set when the stop display of the lost symbol is triggered. In the following, the fourth embodiment will be mainly described in terms of differences from the basic embodiment based on the basic embodiment. In the description of the fourth embodiment, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiments, or similarly corresponding configurations. In addition, if there is a configuration similar to the configuration of the embodiment (first embodiment, etc.) other than the basic embodiment, or if there is a configuration that can be compared, the present embodiment will be described with reference to it. Sometimes.

In the fourth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment and the like, in addition to the variable display of the special figure 1, in the variable display of the special figure 2, the time saving state may be set with the stop display of the lost symbol as a trigger. Then, one of the feature points of the fourth embodiment is when the time saving state is set with the stop display of the predetermined lost symbol in the variable display of the special figure 1 and the predetermined lost symbol in the variable display of the special figure 2. The point is that the privilege related to the opening of the second starting port 12 is different from that when the time saving state is set with the stop display of.

Also in the fourth embodiment, there are a non-time saving state and a time saving state with respect to the gaming state. Further, as the time saving state, there are a first time saving state, a second time saving state, and a third time saving state. In the present embodiment, the first time saving state is a time saving state set when the jackpot game ends. The second time saving state is a time saving state set when the stop display of a predetermined lost symbol (loss symbol B) in the variable display of the special figure 1 is triggered. The third time saving state is a time saving state set when the stop display of a predetermined lost symbol (missing symbol D) in the variable display of the special figure 2 is triggered. Then, in this embodiment, the third time saving state tends to be more advantageous to the player than the second time saving state. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

First, in the fourth embodiment, various tables used by the game control microcomputer 101 for game control, which are different from the basic embodiment, and which are not used in the basic embodiment. explain. As a table different from the basic embodiment, each table related to the auxiliary game opened by the second starting port 12 (hit judgment table, normal figure fluctuation pattern judgment table, auxiliary game control table), loss symbol type judgment table, special feature. FIG. 1 There are a variation pattern determination table, a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table, and a game state setting table when a game state is newly set (changed) according to a stop display of a lost symbol. The explanation will be given in order from each table related to the auxiliary game.

FIG. 68 (A) shows a configuration example of the hit determination table according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 68 (B) shows a configuration example of the normal figure variation pattern determination table according to the fourth embodiment, FIG. 68 (C). Shows a configuration example of the auxiliary game control table according to the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 68 (A), when the hit determination table for the non-time saving state is used, it is determined as a hit with a probability of 6600/65536, and when the hit determination table for the first time saving state is used. Is determined to be a hit with a probability of 59936/65536, and when the hit determination table for the second time saving state is used, it is determined to be a hit with a probability of 50,000/65536, and the hit determination table for the third time saving state is determined. When used, it is determined to be a hit with a probability of 65000/65536. Therefore, it is easy to determine that the hit is a hit in the order of the third time saving state> the first time saving state> the second time saving state> the non-time saving state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), when the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state is used, the normal map fluctuation time is determined to be 30 seconds regardless of the type of the normal map to be stopped. When the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table for the first time saving state is used, the normal map fluctuation time is determined to be 5 seconds regardless of the type of the normal map to be stopped, and the normal map fluctuation pattern determination for the second time saving state is determined. When a table is used, the fluctuation time of the normal map is determined to be 7 seconds regardless of the type of the normal map to be stopped, and when the normal map fluctuation pattern judgment table for the third time saving state is used, the normal map is stopped. Regardless of the type of figure, the fluctuation time of the normal figure is determined to be 3 seconds. Therefore, the number of executions per unit time of the normal map variation display increases (execution frequency) in the order of the third time reduction state> the first time reduction state> the second time reduction state> the non-time reduction state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (C), when the auxiliary game control table for the non-time saving state is used, the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game is 0.2 seconds, and the first time saving state. When the auxiliary game control table for the second time is used, the opening time of the second start port 12 in the auxiliary game is 5.0 seconds, and when the auxiliary game control table for the second time saving state is used, the auxiliary game The opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game is 4.0 seconds, and when the auxiliary game control table for the third time saving state is used, the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game is 5.6 seconds. Become. Therefore, the opening time of the second starting port 12 in one auxiliary game becomes longer in the order of the third time saving state> the first time saving state> the second time saving state> the non-time saving state.

In this way, the hit determination table, the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table, and the auxiliary game control table are different depending on the type of the time reduction state, and the winning probability is the third time reduction state> the first time reduction state> the second time reduction state. The order is higher, the fluctuation time of the normal figure is shorter in the order of 3rd time reduction state> 1st time reduction state> 2nd time reduction state, and the opening time of the 2nd start port 12 in the auxiliary game is 3rd time reduction state> 1st. It is longer in the order of time saving state> second time saving state. Then, the higher the winning probability, the higher the ease of opening (easiness of opening) of the second starting port 12. Further, the shorter the fluctuation time of the normal figure, the higher the ease of opening the second starting port 12. Further, the longer the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game, the higher the ease of opening the second starting port 12. Therefore, in view of this, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 increases in the order of the third time saving state> the first time saving state> the second time saving state, and the game ball wins the second starting port 12. It is easy to do. In other words, it can be said that it is a time-saving state of benefits that are advantageous to the player.

Next, the lost symbol type determination table will be described. FIG. 69 is a loss symbol type determination table according to the fourth embodiment. Also in this embodiment, the lost symbol type determination table is a table for determining the lost symbol type when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. The lost symbol type determination table of this embodiment includes a lost symbol type determination table (special figure 1 lost symbol type determination table) used when variable display of special figure 1 is performed, and when variable display of special figure 2 is performed. There is a lost symbol type determination table (special figure 2 lost symbol type determination table) to be used. Also in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment or the like, the lost symbol type determination is performed by collating the random number for determining the jackpot symbol type with the lost symbol type determination table.

However, unlike the first embodiment and the like, in this embodiment, two types of lost symbols, a lost symbol A and a lost symbol B, are provided as the lost symbol according to the special figure 1, and the lost symbol according to the special figure 2 is lost. Two types of lost symbols, a symbol C and a lost symbol D, are provided. Then, as shown in FIG. 69, in each lost symbol type determination table, a symbol type random number determination value (symbol type random number determination value) is appropriately set for each lost symbol type so as to be a selection rate for each lost symbol type. It is distributed to.

Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table will be described. In the basic embodiment, both the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table are for the non-time saving state and for the time saving state. Further, in the first embodiment and the like, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table is finely divided for the time saving state. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the basic configuration of the special figure variation pattern determination table is the same as that of the above embodiment, but both the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table are time-saving. It is subdivided for the state. Specifically, both the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the time saving state and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the time saving state are associated with the trigger of the time saving state.

More specifically, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the time saving state includes the one for the time saving state after the jackpot game state (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the first time saving state), and the lost symbol B stop display. For the later time saving state (special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for the second time saving state), for the time saving state after the loss symbol D stop display (special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for the third time saving state) There is. In addition, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the time saving state includes the one for the time saving state after the jackpot game state (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the first time saving state), and the time saving after the loss symbol B stop display. There is one for the state (special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the second time saving state) and one for the time saving state after the loss symbol D stop display (special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for the third time saving state).

FIG. 70 (A) is a configuration example of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state, and FIG. 70 (B) is a configuration example of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the first time saving state. 71 (A) is a configuration example of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the second time saving state, and FIG. 71 (B) is a configuration example of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the third time saving state. Further, FIG. 72 (A) is a configuration example of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state, and FIG. 72 (B) is a configuration example of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the first time saving state. 73 (A) is a configuration example of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the second time saving state, and FIG. 73 (B) is a configuration example of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the third time saving state. ..

As shown in FIGS. 70 (A), 70 (B), 71 (A), and 71 (B), the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table shows the special figure 1 when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot. A variation pattern determination table and a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table when the jackpot determination result is a loss are included. In addition, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table when the jackpot judgment result is lost includes the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table (special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for lost symbol A) in the case of the lost symbol A and the loss. There is a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table (special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for lost symbol B) in the case of symbol B. This is because, in this embodiment, as a lost symbol, a time saving state that is advantageous to the player occurs after the stop display of the lost symbol. In that case, the player's expectation is obtained by securing a certain amount of special symbol fluctuation time. This is to ensure that the special figure variation effect that enhances the feeling is executed. That is, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the lost symbol B does not include the special figure 1 variation pattern in which the reach determination result is not associated and the special figure variation effect ends due to the normal variation. On the other hand, the reach determination result is associated with the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the loss symbol A, and the same as the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table relating to the loss for the non-time saving state in the basic embodiment, Further, there are a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the lost symbol A when there is a reach, and a special diagram 1 variation pattern determination table for the lost symbol A when there is no reach.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 72 (A), 72 (B), 73 (A), and 73 (B), the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table shows the special case where the jackpot determination result is a jackpot. FIG. 2 includes a variation pattern determination table and a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table when the jackpot determination result is a loss. In addition, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table when the jackpot judgment result is lost includes the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table (special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for lost symbol C) in the case of the lost symbol C and the loss. There is a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table (special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for lost symbol D) in the case of symbol D. This point is the same as that of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table.

Next, a game state setting table for newly setting (changing) the game state according to the stop display of the lost symbol will be described. In the basic embodiment, when the game state is newly set (changed) according to the end of the jackpot game state, it is based on the game state setting table associated with the jackpot symbol type related to the jackpot game state. The game state has been newly set (changed). In the fourth embodiment, the same applies when the game state is newly set (changed) according to the end of the jackpot game state. Then, when the game state is newly set (changed) according to the stop display of the lost symbol, the game state is basically newly set (changed) based on the game state setting table.

In the game state setting table (game state setting table for loss symbol stop display) when the game state is newly set (changed) according to the stop display of the lost symbol, the stop display of the lost symbol is performed in the non-time saving state. Game state setting table for loss symbol stop display (game state setting table for non-time saving loss symbol stop display) and game state setting table for loss symbol stop display when stop display of lost symbol is performed in the time reduction state (Game state setting table for time saving loss symbol stop display) and. FIG. 74 (A) is a configuration example of a game state setting table for non-time saving loss symbol stop display, and FIG. 74 (B) is a configuration example of a game state setting table for time saving loss symbol stop display.

In addition, the game state setting table for non-time saving loss symbol stop display includes a non-time reduction loss symbol stop display game state setting table (non-time reduction loss symbol B stop display game state setting table) when the loss symbol B is used. There is a non-time saving lost symbol stop display game state setting table (non-time saving lost symbol D stop display game state setting table) in the case of a lost symbol D. The game state setting table for the time-saving loss symbol stop display includes a time-saving loss symbol stop display game state setting table (time-saving loss symbol B stop display game state setting table) and a loss symbol D when the loss symbol B is used. There is a game state setting table for the time saving loss symbol stop display (game state setting table for the time saving loss symbol D stop display). That is, in the game state setting table related to the stop display of the lost symbol, the game state and the lost symbol type are associated with each other. Further, in the present embodiment, the lost symbol B and the lost symbol D are lost symbols in which the subsequent gaming state is set to the time saving state according to the stop display in the variable display of the special figure.

As shown in FIGS. 74 (A) and 74 (B), a non-time saving loss symbol B stop display game state setting table, a non-time saving loss symbol D stop display game state setting table, and a time saving loss symbol B stop display game. According to the state setting table and the game state setting table for the time saving symbol D stop display, the time saving state is set according to the stop display and the losing symbol D of the losing symbol B. In this way, the jackpot determination result is associated with the game state setting table for newly setting (changing) the game state, and the special figure stop display is performed on the game state setting table related to the loss. The game state of the time is associated. Further, the symbol type is associated with the game state setting table related to the jackpot and the game state setting table related to the loss. In the configuration example of the game state setting table for the loss symbol stop display of FIG. 74, the same game state is used in both the non-time saving state and the time saving state, that is, if the loss symbol type is the same regardless of the game state. Is set. However, the time saving state set according to the lost symbol type may be different between the non-time saving state and the time saving state.

Further, when the time saving state is set according to the stop display of the lost symbol B, the end condition of the time saving state is set to "special figure variable display 50 times". That is, the time saving state ends when the special figure variable display is executed 50 times without winning the jackpot, and becomes a non-time saving game state. On the other hand, when the time saving state is set according to the stop display of the lost symbol D, the end condition of the time saving state is set to "special figure variable display 150 times". That is, the time saving state ends when the special figure variable display is executed 150 times without winning the jackpot, and becomes a non-time saving gaming state. That is, the third time saving state set according to the stop display of the lost symbol D is more variable than the second time saving state set according to the stop display of the lost symbol B. It can be said that it is a game state of advantageous privilege, which can be performed many times (the number of times specified for shortening the working hours is large).

In this embodiment, in the second time saving state set according to the stop display of the lost symbol B, the same content as the super chance mode described in the first embodiment is produced. Further, in the third time saving state set according to the stop display of the lost symbol D, the same content as the short chance mode described in the first embodiment is produced.

Next, processing that is performed by the game control microcomputer 101 and whose processing content is different from that of the basic embodiment, and processing that is not performed in the basic embodiment will be described. The processes different from the basic embodiments are the special operation process, the special figure 1 determination process of the special symbol standby process in the special operation process, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, the special figure 2 determination process, and the special figure 2 variation pattern. The determination process and the special symbol determination process in the special operation process. On the other hand, as a process that has not been performed in the basic embodiment, there is a game state setting process after displaying a lost symbol.

First, the special operation processing will be described. The special operation process according to the fourth embodiment will be described. A flowchart of the special operation process is shown in FIG. 75. In the special operation process according to the fourth embodiment, the processes related to the special figure display 81, the special figure hold display 83, and the grand prize device 14D are divided into six statuses (stages). Then, "special operation status = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6" is assigned to each of these statuses.

The game control microcomputer 101 performs a special symbol standby process (S1502) when the "special operation status" is "1", and changes the special symbol when the "special operation status" is "2". The process (S1503) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "3", the special symbol determination process (S1504) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "4", the jackpot game control The process (S1505) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "5", the game state setting process (S1506) after the jackpot game is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "6", the game state setting process (S1506) is performed. After displaying the lost symbol, the game state setting process (S1509) is performed. The "special operation status" is set to "1" by default.

The "special symbol variation process", "big hit game control process", and "game state setting process after the jackpot game state" according to the fourth embodiment are the "special symbol variation process" and "big hit game" according to the basic embodiment. The processing content is the same as that of "control processing" and "game state setting processing". The process related to "special operation status = 5" is "game state setting process after big hit game", which is different from the name in the basic embodiment, but this is a new game state in the fourth embodiment. This is because the name was changed in response to the increase in the opportunity to set (change) to, and the processing contents in "special operation status = 5" are almost the same. In addition, "special figure 1 determination process", "special figure 1 variation pattern determination process", "special figure 2 determination process", and "special figure 2 variation pattern determination process" in the "special symbol standby process" according to the fourth embodiment , And "special symbol determination process" are "special diagram 1 determination process", "special diagram 1 fluctuation pattern determination process", and "special diagram 2 determination process" in the "special symbol standby process" according to the basic embodiment. , And "Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Pattern Judgment Process" and "Special Symbol Confirmation Process". Details of these processes will be described later.

The game state setting process (S1509) after the lost symbol is displayed sets the game state when the stop display of the lost symbol B and the stop display of the lost symbol D are completed and the lost symbol B and the lost symbol D are confirmed. It is a process.

Although the details will be described later, the "special operation status" is changed to "6" in the special symbol determination process when the lost symbol B is stopped and displayed and when the lost symbol D is stopped and displayed. In addition, the "special operation status" is changed to "1" when the game state setting process is completed after the lost symbol is displayed.

Next, the special figure 1 determination process and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process in the special symbol standby process will be described. First, the special figure 1 determination process will be described. FIG. 76 shows a flowchart of the special figure 1 determination process. As shown in FIG. 76, in the special figure 1 determination process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines in step S1621 whether or not the game state related to the jackpot probability is currently the normal probability state. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the game control microcomputer 101 is in the normal probability state, in step S1622, the special figure 1 jackpot determination table for the normal probability state is selected, while it is determined that the game control microcomputer 101 is not in the normal probability state, that is, is in the high probability state. Then, in step S1623, the special figure 1 jackpot determination table for the high probability state is selected.

When the game control microcomputer 101 selects the jackpot determination table, in step S1624, the special figure 1 jackpot determination is performed based on the selected jackpot determination table. In the special figure 1 jackpot determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored special symbol random number stored in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a and collates it with the selected jackpot determination table. Then, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss.

In step S1625, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 jackpot determination is a jackpot. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the jackpot is a jackpot, the special figure 1 jackpot symbol type determination table is selected in step S1626, and the special figure 1 jackpot symbol type determination is performed in step S1627.

In the special figure 1 jackpot symbol type determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the earliest stored symbol type random numbers stored in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a, and reads out the special figure 1 jackpot symbol. It collates with the type determination table and determines which jackpot symbol type it is. When the special figure 1 jackpot symbol type determination is performed, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a symbol type flag indicating the jackpot symbol type, which is the determination result, in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and in step S1629, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the symbol type flag indicating the jackpot symbol type. A symbol designation command indicating the jackpot symbol type, which is the determination result, is set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104, the special diagram 1 determination process is completed, and the process is returned to the special symbol standby process.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1625 that it is not a big hit, the special figure 1 lost symbol type determination table is selected in step S1633, and the special figure 1 lost symbol type determination is performed in step S1634.

In the special figure 1 lost symbol type determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the earliest stored symbol type random numbers stored in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a, and reads the special figure 1 lost symbol. It is collated with the type determination table to determine which lost symbol type is used. When the special figure 1 lost symbol type determination is performed, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a symbol type flag indicating the lost symbol type, which is the determination result, in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and in step S1636, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the symbol type flag indicating the lost symbol type. A symbol designation command indicating the lost symbol type, which is the determination result, is set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104, the special diagram 1 determination process is completed, and the process is returned to the special symbol standby process.

Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process will be described. FIG. 77 shows a flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process. As shown in FIG. 77, in the special figure 1 pattern determination process, in the special figure 1 pattern determination process, first, as step S1641, is the gaming state related to the ease of opening the second starting port 12 a non-time saving state? Judge whether or not. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is in the non-time saving state, in step S1642, it selects the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state, while determining that it is not in the non-time saving state, that is, it is in the time saving state. Then, in step S1643, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the time saving state is selected, and the process proceeds to step S1644.

As described above, in the present embodiment, there are three special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination tables for the time saving state according to the type of the time saving state. The one for the time saving state after the jackpot game state (special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for the first time saving state), the one for the time saving state after the loss symbol B stop display (special figure 1 fluctuation pattern for the second time saving state) Judgment table), the one for the time saving state after the loss symbol D stop display (special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for the third time saving state). Which type of the time saving state is among these three time saving states can be determined by the type of the time saving flag. Therefore, in S1643, the game control microcomputer 101 confirms the type of the time saving flag (for example, the time saving state is the time saving state after the big hit game, or the time saving state is the time saving state after the loss symbol B stop display is displayed. (Determining whether or not), and select the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the time saving state according to the time saving state.

Subsequently, in step S1644, the game control microcomputer 101 confirms the symbol type flag and the like, and determines whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot determination result is a jackpot. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 1 big hit determination result is a big hit, the game control microcomputer 101 is used for the big hit in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table selected in either step S1642 or step S1643 in step S1645. Special figure 1 Select the fluctuation pattern judgment table. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 1 big hit determination result is not a big hit, the game control microcomputer 101 loses in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table selected in either step S1642 or step S1643 in step S1651. Special figure 1 Select the fluctuation pattern judgment table for. In selecting the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the loss, confirmation of the symbol type flag, reach determination by reach random numbers (presence or absence of reach), and the like are appropriately performed.

When the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table is selected in steps S1645 and S1651, the game control microcomputer 101 determines the special figure 1 variation pattern based on the selected special figure 1 variation pattern determination table in step S1656. In the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored special figure fluctuation pattern random number stored in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a, and reads out the special figure fluctuation pattern random number. The special figure 1 variation pattern is determined by collating the pattern random number with the selected special figure 1 variation pattern determination table.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special figure 1 fluctuation start command indicating the determined special figure 1 fluctuation pattern in the output buffer in step S1657, and sets the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determined in step S1658. The corresponding special symbol variation time is set in the special operation timer, the special diagram 1 variation pattern determination process is terminated, and the process is returned to the special symbol standby process.

Further, the special figure 2 determination process and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process of the present embodiment basically have the same processing contents as the special figure 1 determination process (S1609) and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610). Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted. Specifically, the special figure 2 determination process is basically the same as the special figure 1 determination process (S1609), except that the table used in the jackpot symbol type determination is the special figure 2 jackpot symbol type determination table. It is the same process. Further, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process is basically the same as the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610) except that the table used in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination is the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. It is the same process.

Next, the special symbol determination process will be described. FIG. 78 shows a flowchart of the special symbol determination process. As shown in FIG. 78, in the special symbol determination process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines in step S1751 whether or not to end the stop display of the special symbol and determine the special symbol, that is, in step S1703. It is determined whether or not the special figure confirmation time set in the operation timer has elapsed. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special symbol confirmation time has not elapsed, the game control microcomputer 101 ends the special symbol confirmation process. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure determination time has elapsed, it determines in step S1752 whether or not it is currently in the normal probability state (high probability flag is OFF).

If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is not currently in the normal probability state, it proceeds to step S1757, and if it determines that it is currently in the normal probability state, in step S1753, whether or not it is in the time saving state (time saving flag is ON). Is determined. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the time reduction state is not present, the process proceeds to step S1757. , It is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction remaining number counter is "0". When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the value of the time saving remaining number counter (time saving remaining number) is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1757, and the time saving remaining number counter value (time saving remaining number) is "0". If it is determined, in step S1756, the state is changed from the time saving state to the non-time saving state (the time saving flag is turned off), and the process proceeds to step S1757.

In step S1757, the game control microcomputer 101 confirms the current game state, sets a game state command indicating the game state in the output buffer, and in step S1758, the special symbol currently stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol. It is determined whether or not it is. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a jackpot symbol, the game state is reset in step S1759 (a normal game state is set. Specifically, the high probability flag and the time reduction flag are turned off, and the time reduction remaining number of times is set. Set the value of the counter to "0").

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game preparation process in step S1760, changes the special operation status to "4" in step S1761, and ends the special symbol determination process. In the jackpot game preparation process, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a jackpot game control table according to the type of the jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104. In addition, the jackpot opening flag indicating that the opening is in progress according to the jackpot symbol displayed as stopped is turned on in the predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and the predetermined opening time (the jackpot game starts) according to the type of the jackpot symbol. The time from the start of one round to the start of one round) is set in the special operation timer. Further, an opening command indicating the type of the jackpot symbol is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 according to the type of the jackpot symbol. The opening command according to the type of the jackpot symbol indicates that the jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) according to the type of the jackpot symbol that has been stopped and displayed is started.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1758 that the special symbol currently stopped and displayed is not the jackpot symbol, the special symbol currently stopped and displayed is the lost symbol B or the lost symbol D in step S1764. Judge whether or not. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a lost symbol B or a lost symbol D, in step S1766, the special operation status is changed to "6" and the special symbol determination process is completed, while the lost symbol B or the lost symbol B or If it is determined that the symbol is not a lost symbol D, the special operation status is changed to "1" in step S1765, and the special symbol determination process is terminated.

Here, the game state setting process (S1509) after the loss symbol is displayed will be described. As described above, the game control microcomputer 101 performs the game state setting process after displaying the lost symbol when the special operation status is “6”. The game control microcomputer 101 sets the time saving state based on the lost symbol type in the game state setting process after the lost symbol is displayed. Specifically, if the stop display of the lost symbol B is performed, the game control microcomputer 101 has a time saving flag (time reduction after the lost symbol B is displayed) indicating that the time saving state is triggered by the stop display of the lost symbol B. The flag) is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the time saving state, and a game state command indicating that the time saving state is triggered by the stop display of the lost symbol B is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. To do. Further, since the end condition of the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display "50" times, "50" times is set as the time saving specified number and set in the time saving remaining number counter. On the other hand, if the stop display of the lost symbol D is performed, the game control microcomputer 101 has a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is triggered by the stop display of the lost symbol D (time saving flag after the loss symbol D is displayed). Is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the time saving state, and a game state command indicating that the time saving state is triggered by the stop display of the lost symbol D is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. Further, since the end condition of the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display "150" times, "150" times is set as the time saving specified number and set in the time saving remaining number counter. Then, the game control microcomputer 101 changes the special operation status to "1", and ends the game state setting process after displaying the lost symbol.

When the game control microcomputer 101 sets the time saving state in the game state setting process (S1505) after the big hit game, the game control microcomputer 101 has a time saving flag (big hit game state) indicating that the time saving state is triggered by the end of the big hit game state. The time saving flag) is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the time saving state, and a game state command indicating that the time saving state is triggered by the end of the jackpot game state is sent to the output buffer of the game RAM 104. set. Further, when the expected number of time reductions as the end condition is set in the time reduction state, that is, when the time reduction state after the end of the jackpot gaming state related to the jackpot symbols C and F is set, the end condition of the time reduction state is special. Since the number of times the variable display is executed is "100", the time reduction remaining number counter is set with "100" times as the time reduction specified number.

In this way, in the game state setting process after the jackpot game (S1505) and the game state setting process after the loss symbol display (S1509), the time reduction flag indicating the time reduction state includes the time reduction flag after the jackpot game state and the time reduction after the loss symbol B is displayed. Since the flag and the time saving flag after the loss symbol D is displayed are set, the game control microcomputer 101 identifies the time saving state associated with the opportunity based on the time saving flag, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern related to the time saving state. The determination table can be appropriately selected to perform the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the fourth embodiment has a first starting port 11 and a second starting port 12, and the game control microcomputer 101 is a gaming ball to the first starting port 11. The variable display of the special figure 1 can be executed based on the winning, and the variable display of the special drawing 2 can be executed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 12. Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the game state to the second time reduction state in response to the stop display of the lost symbol B in the variable display of the special figure 1, and stops the lost symbol D in the variable display of the special figure 2. The game state is set to the third time saving state according to the display. That is, even if it is a lost symbol, it may shift to a time saving state that is advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the lost symbol. Then, the third time-saving state is in a time-saving state in which a privilege advantageous to the player is given as compared with the second time-saving state. That is, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous because the privilege of the time saving state set after that may differ depending on the starting port where the game ball wins. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, the time saving state is a gaming state in which the second starting port 12 is easily opened. That is, in the time-saving state, a privilege that is more advantageous to the player than in the normal game state is given, in which the game ball can be won in the second starting port 12 which is easier to open than in the normal game state (non-time-saving state). It is in a state of being. For this reason, the player tends to shoot the game ball aiming at the first starting port 11 in the normal gaming state, and tends to shoot the game ball aiming at the second starting port 12 in the time saving state. .. Then, the third time saving state that is transferred based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 12 is more than the second time saving state that is transferred based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 11. , Benefits are given to the player. That is, the third time-saving state of the privilege that is advantageous to the player as compared with the second time-saving state is already in the time-saving state of the privilege that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal game state. It is said that it is easy to become. That is, there is a possibility that the normal gaming state will be changed to the second time saving state of the privilege that is more advantageous to the player, and then the third time saving state of the privilege that is more advantageous to the player may be changed. It is configured so that it can be transferred to the game state of the privilege. As a result, it is possible to make the pachinko gaming machine PY1 with a high level of gaming interest, which gradually shifts to a gaming state with advantageous benefits.

(Example of modification of the fourth embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. For example, in the above embodiment, the time saving state in which the time saving state is set in the variable display of the special figure 2 (the losing symbol D) is set in response to the stoppage, and the variable display of the special drawing 1 There is one type of time saving state (only in the second time saving state and the third time saving state) set in response to the stop of the lost symbol (loss symbol B) in which the time saving state is set in. However, the time saving state in which the time saving state is set in the variable display of the special figure 2 is set in response to the stop, and the losing symbol in which the time saving state is set in the variable display of the special figure 1 is A plurality of types of time saving states may be provided as one or both of the time saving states set according to the stoppage. Even in such a case, for example, in the time saving state set according to the stop of the lost symbol in the variable display of the special figure 2, the lost symbol is stopped in the variable display of the special figure 1. It is preferable that a privilege that is advantageous to the player tends to be given rather than a time saving state that is set accordingly. This is because it becomes easier to gradually shift to the gaming state of advantageous benefits, and it is possible to improve the playing interest. Specifically, for example, in the above embodiment, both the lost symbol related to the variable display of the special figure 1 and the lost symbol related to the variable display of the special figure 2 are lost to shift to the time saving state of the same privilege. Designs may be added.

Further, in the above embodiment, the big hit determination table does not include the small hit, but the small hit may be included so that the small hit can be won by the big hit determination. In this case, as described in the first embodiment or the like, the time saving state may be set triggered by the stop display of the small hit symbol. In addition, when the time saving state is set with the stop display of the small hit symbol as a trigger, the variable display of the special figure 1 is used when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the special figure 2. It is possible to shorten the time of the privilege that is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the small hit symbol is stopped.

Further, in the above embodiment, the time saving state set according to the stop of the lost symbol in the variable display of the special figure 2 corresponds to the stop of the lost symbol in the variable display of the special figure 1. The configuration in which the player tends to be given a privilege that is more advantageous than the time saving state set in However, the time saving state set according to the stop of the lost symbol in the variable display of the special figure 1 is the time saving state set according to the stop of the lost symbol in the variable display of the special figure 2. Rather, the configuration may be such that a privilege advantageous to the player is given.

Further, in the above embodiment, the first starting port 11 (starting port according to the special figure 1) is won by hitting left, and the second starting port 12 (starting port according to the special figure 2) is won by hitting right. I explained the configuration that can aim at. However, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the starting port according to the special figure 1 and the starting port according to the special figure 2 can be aimed at winning by right-handed. Specifically, for example, the starting port according to the special figure 1 and the starting port according to the special figure 2 are known type 2 non-electric accessories that can be opened and closed by an operating mechanism that operates by contact with a game ball. It is conceivable to provide. In this case, for example, a lottery of a normal symbol is performed based on the passage of the game ball, the normal electric accessory is operated based on the winning, and the ball enters the ordinary electric accessory opened by the operation. The game ball may be configured to come into contact with the operating mechanism that opens the starting port of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. Further, either an operating mechanism that opens the starting port of FIG. 1 or an operating mechanism that opens the starting port of FIG. 2 for the game ball that has entered the ordinary electric accessory in the open state. It is also possible to have a switching mechanism that can guide while switching to one side. As a result, as the time saving state, it is possible to provide a time saving state in which the variable display according to the special figure 1 is easy to be performed and a time saving state in which the variable display according to the special figure 2 is easy to be performed. It will be possible to use it as an opportunity, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the above embodiment, the time saving state is generated by deriving the lost symbols B and D as the jackpot determination result by the jackpot determination. However, for example, a determination as to whether or not to generate a time saving state (time saving determination) may be performed before the jackpot determination. In this case, for example, a random number (time saving random number) such as a jackpot random number is provided separately, and the judgment value of the time saving random number is determined by generating the time saving state and not generating the time saving state as in the jackpot judgment. The time reduction determination may be performed by collating with the time reduction determination table appropriately distributed. Then, when it is determined that the time saving state is generated by the time saving determination, the time saving state may be set after the stop display of the lost symbol. Further, in this case, even if the loss symbol is different depending on whether the judgment result that the time saving state is generated by the time saving judgment is derived and the judgment result that the time saving state is not generated by the time saving judgment is derived. good. Furthermore, when the determination result that the time reduction state is generated is derived by the time reduction determination, the type of the lost symbol is further determined from a plurality of, and the jackpot symbol type determination according to the fourth embodiment is performed. As in the loss symbol type determination, the special symbol determination table and the time reduction specified number of times (end condition) used in the time reduction state may be different depending on the type of the loss symbol.

Further, in the above embodiment, the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol B and the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol D shift to different effect modes, but the mode shifts to the same effect mode. You may do so.

Further, in the above embodiment, different times are set for the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol B and the time saving state after the stop display of the lost symbol C, but the same number of times is set. The specified number of time reductions may be set. Further, the same number of time reduction specified times may be set in the time reduction state of all the triggers related to the low probability high base game state.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the fifth embodiment will be described. The fifth embodiment is common to the fourth embodiment in that the time saving state may be set triggered by the stop display of the lost symbol in the variable display of the special figure 1 and the variable display of the special figure 2. In the following, the fifth embodiment will be described mainly based on the fourth embodiment, and the points different from the first embodiment will be described. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiment and the fourth embodiment, or similarly corresponding configurations.

One of the feature points of the fifth embodiment is that the possibility that the lost symbol that causes the time saving state is stopped and displayed differs between the case of the variable display of the special figure 1 and the case of the variable display of the special figure 2. is there. Specifically, the selection rate of the lost symbol that causes the time saving state is different between the special figure 1 lost symbol type determination table and the special figure 2 lost symbol type determination table. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

FIG. 79 is a loss symbol type determination table according to the fifth embodiment. Also in this embodiment, the lost symbol type determination table is a table for determining the lost symbol type when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. Further, in the lost symbol type determination table of the present embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment, the lost symbol type determination table (special figure 1 lost symbol type determination table) used when performing the variable display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 1 are also included. There is a lost symbol type determination table (special figure 2 lost symbol type determination table) used when the variable display of FIG. 2 is performed. Further, also in this embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment or the like, the lost symbol type determination is performed by collating the random number for determining the jackpot symbol type with the lost symbol type determination table.

Further, also in this embodiment, two types of lost symbols, a lost symbol A and a lost symbol B, are provided as the lost symbols related to the special figure 1, and two types of the lost symbols C and the lost symbol D are provided as the lost symbols related to the special figure 2. The loss pattern of is provided. Further, the lost symbol B and the lost symbol D are lost symbols that generate a time saving state.

However, in this embodiment, unlike the fourth embodiment, the selection rate of the lost symbol B in the special figure 1 lost symbol type determination table and the selection rate of the lost symbol D in the special figure 2 lost symbol type determination table are different. .. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability that the lost symbol that causes the time saving state is stopped and displayed is different between the case where the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed and the case where the variable display of the special figure 2 is performed. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection rate of the lost symbol B in the special figure 1 lost symbol type determination table is higher than the selection rate of the lost symbol D in the special figure 2 lost symbol type determination table. Therefore, when the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed, there is a higher possibility that the lost symbol that causes the time saving state is stopped and displayed than when the variable display of the special figure 2 is performed. There is.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the fifth embodiment has the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12, and the game control microcomputer 101 is the gaming ball to the first starting port 11. The variable display of the special figure 1 can be executed based on the winning, and the variable display of the special drawing 2 can be executed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 12. Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the game state to the second time reduction state in response to the stop display of the lost symbol B in the variable display of the special figure 1, and stops the lost symbol D in the variable display of the special figure 2. The game state is set to the third time saving state according to the display. The probability that the lost symbol B is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the special figure 1 is different from the probability that the lost symbol D is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the special figure 2. That is, since the probability of shifting to the time saving state differs depending on the starting port that the player is aiming for, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, the time saving state is a gaming state in which the second starting port 12 is easily opened. That is, in the time-saving state, a privilege that is more advantageous to the player than in the normal game state is given, in which the game ball can be won in the second starting port 12 which is easier to open than in the normal game state (non-time-saving state). It is in a state of being. Further, the player tends to shoot the game ball aiming at the first starting port 11 in the normal gaming state, and tends to shoot the game ball aiming at the second starting port 12 in the time saving state. Then, in the normal gaming state, the profit of the player by setting the time saving state tends to be larger than in the time saving state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state in which the profit of the player by shifting to the time saving state tends to be large, the probability that the time saving state is set according to the lost symbol is higher than in the time saving state. There is. As a result, it is possible to configure the structure so that the player's profit is increased by setting the time saving state according to the lost pattern, and it is possible to maintain the player's mentality and expectation for the time saving state high. Is.

(Example of modification of the fifth embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. For example, in the fifth embodiment, the probability that the lost symbol (missing symbol D) whose time saving state is set by the variable display of the special figure 2 stops is the loss that the time saving state is set by the variable display of the special drawing 1. Although it is extremely lower than the probability that the symbol (lost symbol B) will stop, it is not zero. However, for example, there may be a configuration in which the probability that the lost symbol whose time saving state is set in the variable display of the special figure 2 is stopped is set to zero. Further, the special figure 2 lost symbol type determination table may be configured so that there is no lost symbol in which the time saving state is set. That is, the probability that the lost symbol whose time saving state is set by the variable display of the special figure 2 will stop is lower than the probability that the lost symbol whose time saving state is set by the variable display of the special figure 1 will stop. For example, it is possible to configure the player so that the profit of the player is increased by setting the time saving state according to the lost symbol.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the probability that the lost symbol whose time saving state is set by the variable display of the special figure 2 stops is the probability that the lost symbol whose time saving state is set by the variable display of the special figure 1 stops. The lower configuration was described. However, the probability that the lost symbol whose time saving state is set by the variable display of the special figure 2 will stop is higher than the probability that the lost symbol whose time saving state is set by the variable display of the special figure 1 will stop. Good. In this case, it is possible to increase the probability that the lost symbol for which the time saving state is set will stop again when the time saving state is already in the time saving state, and the time saving exceeds the specified number of times that can be set individually (at one time). It is possible to increase the possibility of playing in the state. That is, it is possible to make it easier for the time-saving state in which the player is given a privilege to continue for a long time, and thereby it is possible to increase the expectation of the player when the time-saving state is changed. If the time saving state continues for too long, the player's expectation for the time saving state may be lowered, and the game interest may be lowered, so that the time saving state can be set continuously. An upper limit may be set. That is, when the time saving state based on the lost symbol is continuously set to a predetermined upper limit number of times, the time saving state is not set based on the lost symbol in the time saving state when the upper limit number of times is reached. Good.

Further, for example, the probability that the lost symbol whose time saving state is set by the variable display of the special figure 2 stops and the probability that the lost symbol whose time saving state is set by the variable display of the special figure 1 stops are different. It can also be applied to so-called "1 type 2 type mixed" pachinko game machines that have both the characteristics of the so-called "1 type (Digi Pachi)" pachinko game machine and the characteristics of the "2 type" pachinko game machine. Good. Specifically, for example, a big hit determination and a small hit determination are performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port in the time saving state, and the game ball that wins the winning opening opened when the small hit is won. Is a game machine that executes a big hit game based on the fact that has passed a specific area. In the case of such a configuration, since the probability of winning a small hit based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port is relatively high, the big hit is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port. Even if neither the judgment nor the small hit judgment is won, the time saving state is set according to the lost symbol displayed as stopped, so that the small hit winning can be aimed again in the set time saving state. , It may be possible to generate great profits for the player. Therefore, when applied to a so-called "1 type 2 type mixed" pachinko gaming machine, the probability that the lost symbol whose time reduction state is set by the variable display of special figure 2 will stop is displayed in a variable manner of special figure 1. From the viewpoint that it is easy to set the time saving state that can aim for a small hit winning continuously, and it is easy to continue the state with high game interest for a long time by making the configuration higher than the probability that the lost symbol whose time saving state is set in preferable.

Further, for example, the probability that the lost symbol whose time saving state is set by the variable display of the special figure 2 stops and the probability that the lost symbol whose time saving state is set by the variable display of the special figure 1 stops are different. , It may be applied to a pachinko gaming machine having a so-called "small hit rush state" in which it is easy to win a prize in a predetermined large winning opening based on the small hit winning. Specifically, for example, the first starting port according to FIG. 1 is provided in the flow path (left flow path) of the game ball during left-handed striking, and the flow path (right flow path) of the game ball during right-handed strike is special. The first start port according to FIG. 1 and the second start port according to special figure 2 are provided, and the first start port of the right flow path is configured as a variable start port that can be easily opened in a short time state, and further, right flow down. It is a game machine provided with a large winning opening that can be opened based on a small hit winning on the downstream side of the variable starting opening on the route. In the case of such a configuration, if a small hit is won according to the winning of the second starting opening in the non-time saving state, the game ball that does not win the variable starting opening with a low opening frequency is more than the variable starting opening. It is easy to win a prize in the downstream variable starting port, and it becomes a so-called "small hit rush state". Then, in the "small hit rush state", the time saving state is set according to the lost symbol that is stopped and displayed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port, so that the opening frequency of the variable starting port becomes high. As the frequency of winning the game ball to the variable starting opening increases, the frequency of winning to the large winning opening downstream of the variable starting opening decreases. That is, the "small hit rush state" suddenly ends without a big hit by setting the time saving state according to the lost symbol that is stopped and displayed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port. It will be possible to realize a novel game. Therefore, when applied to a pachinko machine having a so-called "small hit rush state", the "small hit rush state" is suddenly terminated by setting the time saving state based on the loss pattern, which is a new hobby. Can be provided. Then, from the viewpoint of frequently realizing a novel game property in which the so-called "small hit rush state" is suddenly ended without going through a big hit, a lost symbol in which a time saving state is set by the variable display of Special Figure 2 It is preferable that the probability that the game stops is higher than the probability that the lost symbol whose time saving state is set in the variable display of the special figure 1 stops.

7. Other Modification Examples Next, other modification examples of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the basic embodiment and the first embodiment and the like will be described below. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the basic embodiment, the first embodiment, and the like will be referred to as “pachinko gaming machine PY1 and the like”.

In pachinko game machines such as PY1, variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed using the display unit 50a in order to notify the special figure lottery result, but instead of the image display device, a so-called "rotating drum type game machine" (Slot machine) ”may be arranged, and the special figure lottery result may be notified by variably displaying the drum on which the symbol is displayed. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and the like, the big winning opening 14 can be opened in the big hit game, but a winning area that can be opened in the big hit game may be provided in addition to the big winning opening 14.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 or the like, when it is determined to be a specific jackpot symbol type, the game always proceeds in a high probability state after the jackpot game. That is, the setting of the high probability state is associated with the jackpot symbol type. However, the setting conditions of the high probability state may be changed. For example, apart from the big prize device 14D, a second big prize device that can be opened and closed and allows the game ball to enter when opened is provided at a position where the game ball in the game area 6 can reach, and during the big hit game. When the second big prize device is opened in a predetermined round game and the game ball that has entered the second big prize device passes through a specific area provided on the downstream side thereof, a high probability state is reached with the end of the big hit game. May be set.

In this case, for example, a specific jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that makes it easy to set a high probability state) that the second big prize device opens for a time (for example, 29.5 seconds) that is easy to enter, and the second big prize device wins the ball. A non-specific jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that makes it difficult to set a high probability state) that opens for a difficult time (for example, 0.5 seconds) can be provided. In addition, there are a specific area and a non-specific area as areas through which the game ball won in the second large prize device can pass, and a distribution device for distributing the game ball into the specific area and the non-specific area is provided. Then, although the opening time of the second prize-winning device is the same, the jackpot symbol and the high-probability state that make it easy to set the high-probability state can be obtained by combining the opening mode of the second prize-winning device and the operating mode of the sorting device. It is also possible to provide a jackpot symbol that is difficult to set.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and the like, the game control board 100 performs basic control related to the progress of the game, and the effect control board performs basic control related to the progress of the effect according to the progress of the game (control of the game). Although the game control and the effect control are performed on different boards as in the case of 120, it may be configured to perform the game control and the effect control on one board. In this case, the image control board 140 may be included in the one board, or may be provided separately from the one board.

Further, the game machine of the present invention can be applied to other ball game machines such as an arrange ball machine and a sparrow ball game machine, a rotating body type game machine (so-called "slot machine"), and the like. Further, each pachinko gaming machine PY1 described in the above-described embodiment and its modified example can be combined with the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to another embodiment and its modified example. That is, for example, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 described in the above embodiment can be configured to include a part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to another embodiment.

8. Inventions disclosed in the above-described embodiments The following inventions A to B are disclosed up to the preceding paragraph in this [mode for carrying out the invention]. In the description of Inventions A to B, the names and expressions of the corresponding configurations in the embodiment of the invention described above and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, elements such as means constituting each invention are not limited to this appendix. Invention A is a general term for the following inventions A1 to A3, and invention B is a general term for the following inventions B1 to B3.

8-1-1. Invention A1
When the predetermined first variable condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port 11) or the second variable condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port 12) is satisfied, the identification information (special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner. Is possible, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode (big hit symbol), a big hit game accompanied by opening of a variable winning opening (big winning opening 14) provided in the game area (game area 6) can be played. In a game machine (pachinko game machine PY1) provided with a game control means (game control microcomputer 101) to be executed.
The game control means
When the openable and closable variable start port (second start port 12) provided in the game area is in the normal gaming state in response to the stop display of the identification information in a non-specific mode (loss symbol) different from the specific mode. It may be in a specific game state (time saving state) that is easier to open than
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the non-specific mode in response to the establishment of the second variable condition, the identification information is stopped and displayed in the non-specific mode in response to the establishment of the first variable condition. A gaming machine characterized in that it is easy to put it into the specific gaming state, which is a privilege advantageous to the player (the second starting port 12 is easy to open and the number of times specified for shortening the time is large).

8-1-2. Invention A2
A gaming machine according to invention A1.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second variable condition is satisfied based on the entry of a gaming ball into the variable starting port.

8-1--3. Invention A3
A gaming machine according to invention A1 or invention A2.
The game control means is a game machine characterized in that the specific game state may be set in response to the end of the jackpot game.

8-2-1. Invention B1
When the predetermined first variable condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port 11) or the second variable condition (winning of the game ball to the second starting port 12) is satisfied, the identification information (special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner. Is possible, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode (big hit symbol), a big hit game accompanied by opening of a variable winning opening (big winning opening 14) provided in the game area (game area 6) can be played. In a game machine provided with a game control means (game control microcomputer 101) to be executed,
The game control means
When the openable and closable variable start port (second start port 12) provided in the game area is in the normal gaming state in response to the stop display of the identification information in a non-specific mode (loss symbol) different from the specific mode. It may be in a specific game state (time saving state) that is easier to open than
When the first variation condition is satisfied, there is a higher possibility that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the non-specific mode than when the second variation condition is satisfied (the subsequent gaming state is a time saving state). A game machine characterized in that there is a high probability that a symbol will be selected.

8-2-2. Invention B2
A gaming machine according to invention B1.
The game area has a starting port (first starting port 11) provided separately from the variable starting port.
The first variable condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second variable condition is satisfied based on the entry of a gaming ball into the variable starting port.

8-2-3. Invention B3
A gaming machine according to invention B1 or invention B2.
The game control means is a game machine characterized in that the specific game state may be set in response to the end of the jackpot game.

PY1 ... Pachinko game machine 1 ... Game board 11 ... 1st starting port 11a ... 1st starting port sensor 12 ... 2nd starting port 12a ... 2nd starting port sensor 14 ... Large winning opening 14a ... Large winning opening sensor 40 ... 1st Effect button device 40k ... 1st effect button 40a ... 1st effect button sensor 41 ... 2nd effect button device 41k ... 2nd effect button 41a ... 2nd effect button sensor 50 ... Image display device 50a ... Display 52 ... Speaker 53 ... Frame lamp 55 ... Board movable device 55k ... Board movable body 100 ... Game control board 101 ... Game control microcomputer 120 ... Production control board 121 ... Production control microcomputer 140 ... Image control board

Claims (1)

When a predetermined first variable condition or second variable condition is satisfied, the variable display of the identification information can be executed, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the openable and closable variable winning opening provided in the game area is opened. In a game machine equipped with a game control means for executing a jackpot game accompanied by
The game control means
In response to the stop display of the identification information in a non-specific mode different from the specific mode, the variable start opening provided in the game area is set to a specific game state in which it is easier to open than in the normal game state. There is
The identification information is stopped and displayed in the non-specific mode according to the establishment of the second variable condition, and the identification information is stopped and displayed in the non-specific mode according to the establishment of the first variable condition. A gaming machine characterized in that it may be put into a specific gaming state.

Images